Express GUI Guide PDF

PSSE 33.
5
PSSExpress 33.5 GUI Users Guide
September 2013
Siemens Industry, Inc.

Siemens Power Technologies International
400 State Street, PO Box 1058
Schenectady, NY 12301-1058 USA
+1 518-395-5000
www.siemens.com/power-technologies
Copyright 1990-2013 Siemens Industry, Inc., Siemens Power Technologies International

Information in this manual and any software described herein is confidential and subject to change without notice and does not
represent a commitment on the part of Siemens Industry, Inc., Siemens Power Technologies International. The software
described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement and may be used or copied only
in accordance with the terms of the agreement. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, for any purpose other than the purchasers personal use, without the
express written permission of Siemens Industry, Inc., Siemens Power Technologies International.
PSSE high-performance transmission planning software is a registered trademark of Siemens Industry, Inc., Siemens Power
Technologies International in the United States and other countries.
The Windows 2000 operating system, the Windows XP operating system, the Windows Vista operating system, the
Windows 7 operating system, the Visual C++ development system, Microsoft Office Excel and Microsoft Visual Studio are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Intel Visual Fortran Compiler for Windows is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
The Python programming language is a trademark of the Python Software Foundation.
Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Table Of Contents
Part 1: The Working Case
Chapter 1 - Introduction
1.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.2
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1.3
Startup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
1.4
Establishing the Working Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
1.5
Changing Program Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
1.6
Defining the Program Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
1.7
Changing Program Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12

Activity OPTN
1.7.1
Extended Bus Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
1.8
Displaying and Resetting Timing Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14

Activity TIME
1.9
The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15

1.9.1 Using the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
1.10 Creating a Working Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

1.11 Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
1.11.1 Resetting Dialog Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
1.11.2 Closing the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Chapter 2 - Spreadsheet View

2.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2.2
Editing and Formatting the Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

2.2.1 Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
2.2.2 Managing Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
2.2.3 Header/Footer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
2.2.4 Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
2.2.5 Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
2.3
Network Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

2.3.1 Revising the Working Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
2.3.2 Creating a Bus Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
2.3.3 Using the Subsystem Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
2.4
Exporting Spreadsheet Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
2.5
Undoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
All material contained in this documentation is proprietary to Siemens Industry Inc., Siemens Power Technologies International.
PSSE 33.5
Chapter 3 - Diagram View

3.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2
Specifying Diagram Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3
Creating a New Power Flow Case using Diagram View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

3.3.1 Adding Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3.2 Adding Network Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.4
Opening or Importing Existing Diagram Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

3.4.1 Slider Diagram File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.4.2 Importing a DRAW File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Activity DRAW
3.4.3
Importing an Image File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.5
Diagram Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.6
Revising a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 Using Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2 Using Diagram Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.3 Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.4 Binding Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.5 Displaying and Modifying Network Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.6 Drawing a Missing Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.7 Renumbering Buses in the Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.8 Specifying Bus Locations from a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.9 Moving Diagram Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.10 Changing Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.11 Displaying ISO Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.12 Animating Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.13 Viewing Current Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.14 Multi-Section Line Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.15 Item Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.16 Contouring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.17 Customizing Tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7
Using Auto-Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

3.7.1 Bus Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.8
Displaying Power Flow Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.1 Power Flow Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.2 Range Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.3 Adding a Summation Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.4 Adding a Report Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9
Displaying Impedance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

3.9.1 Impedance Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-24
3-24
3-24
3-27
3-29
3-30
3-30
3-31
3-32
3-32
3-38
3-44
3-49
3-49
3-51
3-54
3-55
3.10 Displaying Graphical Difference Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

Activity GDIF
3.10.1 Comparison Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
3.11 Creating a Bus Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Activity GOUT/GEXM
3.11.1 Single Bus Display Labels and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
ii
PSSE 33.5
3.11.2 Navigating the Network Using the Single Bus Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-64
3.11.3 Converting Grow Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-65
3.12 Generating a Graphical Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-67
Activity GRPG
3.13 Diagram Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-69
3.13.1 Diagram Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-69
3.13.2 Errors/Missing Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-69
3.13.3 Diagram Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-70
3.13.4 Property Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-73
3.13.5 Cleaning the Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-73
3.14 Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-75
3.14.1 Image File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-75
3.14.2 Bus Location File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-75
3.14.3 Google Earth Locations File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-75
3.15 Closing the Diagram View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-76
Chapter 4 - Data Selection Tree View

4.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
4.2
Network Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
4.3
OPF Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
4.4
Dynamics Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
4.5
Models Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
4.6
Plot Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Chapter 5 - Tools
5.1
Customizing Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
5.2
Configuring Custom Toolbar Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
5.3
Creating Custom Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Part 2: PSSExpress Activities

Chapter 6 - Power Flow Data Entry
6.1
Retrieving a Power Flow Saved Case File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

Activity CASE
6.2
Listing Saved Case Filenames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Activity SHOW
6.3
Reading Power Flow Raw Data into the Working Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
6.3.1 Standard Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Activity READ
6.3.2 Subsystem Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Activity READ
iii
PSSE 33.5
6.4
Reading / Changing Power Flow Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Activity RDCH
6.5
Selecting Extended Bus Name Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.6
Adding Machine Impedance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Activity MCRE
6.7
Managing Case Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

6.7.1 Importing a Long Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Activity RETI
6.7.2 Changing the Case Title and the Long Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Activity CHTI
Chapter 7 - Power Flow Data Modification

7.1
Changing Service Status and Power Flow Parametric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1.1 Inter-area Transfer Data Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2
Electrically Disconnecting/Reconnecting a Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Activity DSCN/RECN
7.3
Joining Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Activity JOIN
7.3.1
JOIN Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.4
Splitting Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Activity SPLT
7.5
Tapping a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Activity LTAP
7.6
Changing Equipment Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

Activity MBID
7.7
Moving Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

Activity MOVE
7.8
Removing Buses and Connected Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

Activity PURG/EXTR
7.8.1
7.8.2
7.9
Removing Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Removing Outaged Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Scaling Loads, Generators, and/or Shunts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Activity SCAL
7.10 Changing Adjustment Enable Flags of Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Activity TFLG
7.11 Importing an ECDI Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7.12 Changing Area Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Activity ARNM
Activity LDAR
iv
PSSE 33.5
7.13 Changing Owner Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36

Activity OWNM
7.14 Changing Zone Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
Activity ZONM
Activity LDZO
7.15 Renumbering Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
Activity BSNM
7.15.1 Renumbering Buses by Bus Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
File Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Dialog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
7.15.2 Renumbering Buses by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42
File Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Dialog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7.15.3 Renumbering Buses by Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43
7.15.4 Renumbering Buses By Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-44
All Buses Without Area Blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
All Buses With Area Blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Subsystem Bus Number Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Subsystem Bus Number Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
7.16 Renumbering Buses in Auxiliary Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Activity RNFI
Chapter 8 - Data Reports

8.1
Working Case Data Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1

8.1.1 Power Flow Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Activity LIST
8.1.2 Listing Buses in Alphabetical Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Activity ALPH
8.1.3 Listing Buses and their Connected Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Activity EXAM
8.1.4 Outaged Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Activity OUTS
8.1.5 Listing Bus Shunts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Activity SHNT
8.2
Listing File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6

8.2.1 System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Activity SIZE
8.2.2 Saved Case and Snapshot Filenames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Activity SHOW
8.2.3 Unused Bus Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Activity BUSN
PSSE 33.5
Chapter 9 - Case Comparison

9.1
Comparing Power Flow Case Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Activity CMPR
9.2
Comparing Power Flow Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Activity DIFF
9.3
Comparing AC Tie Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Activity DFTI
Chapter 10 - Creating Power Flow Data Files

10.1 Creating a Saved Case File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Activity SAVE
10.2 Saving the Working Case in an IEEE Common Format File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Activity RWCM
10.3 Saving Machine Impedance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Activity RWMA
10.4 Creating a Power Flow Raw Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Activity RAWD
Chapter 11 - Power Flow Solutions

11.1 Specifying Solution Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.1 Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.2 Gauss-Seidel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.3 Newton-Raphson Solution Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2
11-2
11-3
11-3
11.2 Running Power Flow Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

11.2.1 Decoupled Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Activity NSOL
11.2.2 Fully-Coupled Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Activity FNSL
11.2.3 Fixed Slope Decoupled Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Activity FDNS
11.2.4 Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution with Inertial / Governor Dispatch . 11-12
Activity INLF
11.2.5 Gauss-Seidel Power Flow Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Activity SOLV
11.2.6 Modified Gauss-Seidel Power Flow Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Activity MSLV
Chapter 12 - Power Flow Data Verification

12.1 Checking Branch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Activity BRCH
vi
PSSE 33.5
12.2 Checking/Changing Controlled Bus Scheduled Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3

Activity CNTB
12.3 Checking/Changing Transformer Adjustment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
Activity TPCH
12.4 Check for Islands Without a Swing Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8
Activity TREE
Chapter 13 - Power Flow Reports

13.1 Area/Zone-Based Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-1
13.1.1 Area-to-Area Interchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-1
Activity INTA
13.1.2 Zone-to-Zone Interchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Activity INTZ
13.1.3 Loadings on Tie Lines from Interchange Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
Activity TIES
13.1.4 Loadings on Tie Lines from Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Activity TIEZ
13.2 Area/Owner/Zone Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-8
13.2.1 Area Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-8
Activity AREA
13.2.2 Owner Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9
Activity OWNR
13.2.3 Zone Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Activity ZONE
13.3 Bus-Based Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-14
13.3.1 Producing a Standard Power Flow Solution Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-14
Activity POUT
13.3.2 Wide-Format Power Flow Solution Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-16
Activity LOUT
13.3.3 Wide-Format Power Flow Solution Report with Branch Current Loadings .13-18
Activity LAMP
13.3.4 Summary of Subsystem Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-19
Activity SUBS
13.3.5 Summarizing Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-21
Activity LODR
13.4 Limit Checking Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-23
13.4.1 Machine Reactive Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-24
Activity GCAP
13.4.2 Generator Bus Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-25
Activity GENS
vii
PSSE 33.5
13.4.3 Machine Terminal Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26

Activity GEOL
13.4.4 Branch Overloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
Activity RAT3
13.4.5 Transmission Line Overloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
Activity OLTL
13.4.6 Transformer Overloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
Activity OLTR
13.4.7 Branch Current Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
Activity RATE
13.4.8 Voltage Controlled Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Activity REGB
13.4.9 Controlling Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
Activity TLST
13.4.10 Out-of-limit Bus Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
Activity VCHK
13.5 Reporting DC Network Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
Activity MTDC
13.6 Restricting the Output of Large Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.6.1 By Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.6.2 By Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.6.3 By Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.7 Exporting Power Flow Results to Microsoft Excel
13-34
13-34
13-34
13-35
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
Chapter 14 - Program Automation

14.1 Reproducing User Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.2 Creating Program Automation Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.2.1 Response File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Activity IDEV
14.2.2 Python and IPLAN Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.3 Executing Automation Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.3.1 Run Automation File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.3.2 IPLAN Program File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Activity EXEC
14.3.3 PSEB Command File, Power Flow Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Activity PSEB
14.3.4 PSAS Command File, Dynamic Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Activity PSAS
14.3.5 Argument Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
14.3.6 Re-Run Last Automation File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
14.4 Editing an Automation File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
viii
PSSE 33.5
14.5 Inserting Comments into the Progress Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-9

Activity TEXT
Chapter 15 - Output Controls

15.1 Directing Solution Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-1
15.1.1 Global Report Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-1
Activity OPEN
15.1.2 Progress Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-2
Activity PDEV
15.1.3 Alerts and Prompts Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-3
Activity ODEV
15.2 Setting the Path for Use with & Filenames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-4
Activity PATH
Chapter 16 - Scenarios
16.1 Creating a Scenario File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-1
16.2 Building a Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-2
16.3 Opening an Existing Scenario File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-5
16.4 Closing a Scenario File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-6
Appendix A - Summary of Toolbar Selections

A.1
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Appendix B - Network Component Data Records
ix
PSSE 33.5
List of Figures
Figure 1-1.
Properties Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Figure 1-2.
Program Preferences Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Figure 1-3.
Program Settings Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Figure 1-4.
Key Elements of the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Figure 1-5.
View Activation Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Figure 1-6.
Command Line Interface Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Figure 1-7.
New and Build New Case Dialogs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Figure 2-1.
Spreadsheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Figure 2-2.
Spreadsheet Column Right-Click Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-3.
Cells Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-4.
Spreadsheet Header / Footer Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-5.
Spreadsheet Page Setup Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-6.
Print Setup Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2-7.
Network Spreadsheet View, Bus Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2-8.
Creating a Bus Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-9.
Bus Subsystem Selector Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Figure 2-10.
Filter Bus Subsystem Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Figure 3-1.
Diagram View with Slider Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3-2.
Diagram Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Figure 3-3.
Color Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Figure 3-4.
Font Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Figure 3-5.
Select Directory for Image Files Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Figure 3-6.
Example: Automatic Bus Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-7.
Adding Buses to the Database Using the Diagram View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-8.
Adding Network Elements to the Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-9.
Image Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 3-10.
Diagram Template, Double Bus and Single Breaker, 4 Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Figure 3-11.
Example of Diagram View Right-click Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Figure 3-12.
Select Bus Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Figure 3-13.
Make Labels Selectable Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Figure 3-14.
Saved Views Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Figure 3-15.
Impact of Auto-Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Figure 3-16.
Line Style Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Figure 3-17.
Customized Right-Click Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
xi
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure 3-18.
Alternative Bus Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Figure 3-19.
Example of Switch Function to Out-of-Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Figure 3-20.
Insert a Breaker Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Figure 3-21.
Insert a Switch Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Figure 3-22.
Moving and Resizing Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Figure 3-23.
Moving Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Figure 3-24.
Changing Line Status from Diagram View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Figure 3-25.
Examples of Transformer Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Figure 3-26.
Animated Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Figure 3-27.
Current Loading Blocks Indicating Flow Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Figure 3-28.
Multi-Line Section Reporting ON and OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Figure 3-29.
Bus Annotation Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Figure 3-30.
Annotation Properties Options for Shunts and Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Figure 3-31.
Branch / Two Winding Transformer Annotation Properties Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Figure 3-32.
Three-Winding Transformer Annotation Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Figure 3-33.
Other Annotation Properties Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Figure 3-34.
FACTS Device Annotation Properties Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Figure 3-35.
Contour Settings Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Figure 3-36.
6 X 6 Virtual Grid Superimposed on Contour Points P1 P6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Figure 3-37.
Circle of Influence around Contour Point P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Figure 3-38.
Linear Approximation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Figure 3-39.
Linear Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Figure 3-40.
Non-Uniform Partitioning using the QuadTree Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Figure 3-41.
Alternative Tooltip Presentations for a Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Figure 3-42.
Drawing Bus 101 and Buses Two Levels Out, using the Auto Draw Toolbar Button .
3-47
Figure 3-43.
Power Flow Results in Diagram View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Figure 3-44.
Power Flow Data Annotation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Figure 3-45.
Signs and Arrows to Display Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Figure 3-46.
Diagram Range Checking Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Figure 3-47.
Voltage Level Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Figure 3-48.
Line Ratings Appearance Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Figure 3-49.
Bus Voltage Limit Appearance Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Figure 3-50.
Out-of-Service Equipment Appearance Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Figure 3-51.
Power Flow Diagram showing Effect of Range Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Figure 3-52.
Edit Summation Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Figure 3-53.
Example of Report Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Figure 3-54.
Example of Impedance Data in a One-Line Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Figure 3-55.
Impedance Data Annotation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Figure 3-56.
Compare Cases on a Diagram Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
xii
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure 3-57.
Example of Case Comparison Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Figure 3-58.
Graphical Case Comparison Data Annotation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Figure 3-59.
Select Bus Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Figure 3-60.
Example of Single Bus Display, Power Flow Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Figure 3-61.
Example of Single Bus Display, Impedance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Figure 3-62.
Scrolling through the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Figure 3-63.
Terminal Read Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Figure 3-64.
GRPG-Style Graphical Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Figure 3-65.
Diagram Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Figure 3-66.
Results Generated by the Check Menu Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Figure 3-67.
Layers Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Figure 3-68.
Status Bar Showing Active Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Figure 3-69.
Setting the Active Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Figure 3-70.
All Layers Visible from Layers Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Figure 3-71.
Only Default Visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Figure 3-72.
JPEG Quality Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Figure 4-1.
Network Tree View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Figure 4-2.
Tree View, Buses in Active Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Figure 4-3.
Some Tree View Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Figure 4-4.
OPF Tree View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Figure 4-5.
Dynamics Tree View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Figure 4-6.
Models Tree View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Figure 4-7.
Plot Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Figure 5-1.
Customize Dialog, Toolbars Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Figure 5-2.
Customize Dialog: Commands Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Figure 5-3.
Customize Toolbar Buttons Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Figure 5-4.
Defined Toolbar Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Figure 5-5.
Custom Toolbar Showing Defined Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Figure 5-6.
New Toolbar Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Figure 6-1.
Example of Power Flow Saved Case File Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Figure 6-2.
Read Power Flow Raw Data Dialog, Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Figure 6-3.
Read Power Flow Raw Data Dialog, RDCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Figure 6-4.
Select Extended Bus Name Input Format Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Figure 6-5.
Case Titles Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Figure 7-1.
Inter-area Transfer Spreadsheet, Transfer MW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Figure 7-2.
Disconnect/Reconnect Bus Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Figure 7-3.
Bus Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Figure 7-4.
Bus Filter Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Figure 7-5.
Example of Disconnect Bus Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
xiii
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure 7-6.
Example of Reconnect Bus Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Figure 7-7.
Join Buses Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Figure 7-8.
Example of Join Buses Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Figure 7-9.
Original Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Figure 7-10.
Revised Topology After Joining Buses 154 and 3008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Figure 7-11.
Split Buses Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Figure 7-12.
Reassign Branches and Equipment Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Figure 7-13.
Bus 3003 to be Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Figure 7-14.
Bus Selection and Reassignment for Bus Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Figure 7-15.
Example of Split Buses Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Figure 7-16.
Diagram View of New Topology following Bus Split. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Figure 7-17.
Tap Line Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Figure 7-18.
Line Selected to be Tapped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Figure 7-19.
Specification of a Branch for the Tap Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Figure 7-20.
Final Stage in Tap Line Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Figure 7-21.
New Topology on Tapped Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Figure 7-22.
Inter-area Transfer Spreadsheet, Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Figure 7-23.
Move Network Elements Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Figure 7-24.
Original Topology before Moving Branch 151 - 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Figure 7-25.
Branch Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Figure 7-26.
Bus Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Figure 7-27.
Example of Moving a Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Figure 7-28.
New Topology Following Branch Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Figure 7-29.
Deleting Network Elements Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Figure 7-30.
Example of Deleted Buses and the Diagram Properties Options. . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Figure 7-31.
Example of Removing Outaged Equipment Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Figure 7-32.
Scale Powerflow Data Dialog to Specify Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Figure 7-33.
Scale Powerflow Data Dialog to Enter Scaling Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Figure 7-34.
Example of Scaling Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Figure 7-35.
Transformer Adjustment Flags Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Figure 7-36.
Renumbering Areas/Owners/Zones Dialog: Area Assignments Tab . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Figure 7-37.
Renumbering Areas/Owners/Zones Dialog: Owner Assignments Tab . . . . . . . 7-37
Figure 7-38.
Renumbering Areas/Owners/Zones Dialog: Zone Assignments Tab. . . . . . . . . 7-39
Figure 7-39.
Zone Reassignment Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Figure 7-40.
Renumber Buses by Bus Number Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Figure 7-41.
Renumber Buses by Bus Name Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Figure 7-42.
Renumber Buses by Bus Packing Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Figure 7-43.
Renumber Buses by Subsystem Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Figure 7-44.
Example of Block Numbers By Area Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
xiv
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure 7-45.
Renumber Buses in Auxiliary Files Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Figure 8-1.
List Data Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Figure 8-2.
File Information Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Figure 9-1.
Compare Case Totals Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Figure 9-2.
Example of Compare Case Totals Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Figure 9-3.
Compare Power Flow Cases Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Figure 9-4.
Select Powerflow Comparison Options Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Figure 9-5.
Example of Compare Cases Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Figure 9-6.
Compare Tie Lines Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Figure 9-7.
Select Tie Line Comparison Options Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Figure 10-1.
Save Network Data Dialog, Case Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Figure 10-2.
Save Network Data Dialog, IEEE Common Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Figure 10-3.
Save Network Data Dialog, Machine Impedance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Figure 10-4.
Save Network Data Dialog, Power Flow Raw Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Figure 11-1.
Power Flow Solution Parameters Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Figure 11-2.
Power Flow Solution Parameters Dialog, Gauss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Figure 11-3.
Power Flow Solution Parameters Dialog, Newton. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Figure 11-4.
Loadflow Solutions Dialog, Newton-Raphson, Decoupled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Figure 11-5.
Example of Newton-Raphson Decoupled Solution Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Figure 11-6.
Loadflow Solutions Dialog, Newton-Raphson, Fully-Coupled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Figure 11-7.
Example of Newton-Raphson Fully-Coupled Solution Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Figure 11-8.
Loadflow Solutions Dialog, Newton-Raphson, Fixed Slope Decoupled . . . . . 11-11
Figure 11-9.
Example of Newton-Raphson Fixed Slope Decoupled Solution Output . . . . . 11-12
Figure 11-10. N-R Solution with Inertial / Governor Redispatch Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Figure 11-11. Example of Newton-Raphson Solution with Governor Redispatch . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Figure 11-12. Loadflow Solutions Dialog, Gauss-Seidel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Figure 11-13. Example of Gauss-Seidel Solution Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Figure 11-14. Loadflow Solutions Dialog, Modified Gauss-Seidel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Figure 12-1.
Check Branch Parameters Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Figure 12-2.
Check/Change Controlled Bus Scheduled Voltages Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Figure 12-3.
Change Voltage Setpoint Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Figure 12-4.
Change Vmin/Vmax Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Figure 12-5.
Check/Change Transformer Adjustment Data Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Figure 12-6.
Change Transformer Tap Step Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Figure 12-7.
Change Transformer Flow Band Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Figure 12-8.
Example Dialog of Activity TREE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Figure 13-1.
Area/Zone Based Reports Dialog, Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Figure 13-2.
Example of Area Interchange Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Figure 13-3.
Area/Zone Based Reports Dialog, Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
xv
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure 13-4.
Example of Zone Interchange Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Figure 13-5.
Area/Zone Based Reports Dialog, Area Tie Line Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Figure 13-6.
Example of Area Tie Line Loadings Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Figure 13-7.
Area/Zone Based Reports Dialog, Zone Tie Line Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Figure 13-8.
Example of Zone Tie Line Loadings Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Figure 13-9.
Area/Owner/Zone Totals Dialog, Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Figure 13-10. Example of Area Totals Report with Zone Subtotals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Figure 13-11. Area/Owner/Zone Totals Dialog, Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Figure 13-12. Example of Owner Totals Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Figure 13-13. Area/Owner/Zone Totals Dialog, Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Figure 13-14. Example of Zone Totals Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Figure 13-15. Bus Based Reports Dialog, Standard Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Figure 13-16. Example of Standard Format Power Flow Solution Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Figure 13-17. Bus Based Reports Dialog, Wide Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Figure 13-18. Example of Wide Format Power Flow Solution Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Figure 13-19. Bus Based Reports Dialog, Wide Format, with Branch Current Loadings . . . . 13-18
Figure 13-20. Example of Wide Format Power Flow Solution Report with Branch Current Loadings
13-19
Figure 13-21. Bus Based Reports Dialog, Subsystem Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Figure 13-22. Example of Subsystem Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Figure 13-23. Bus Based Reports Dialog, Load Reduction Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Figure 13-24. Limit Checking Reports Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
Figure 13-25. Example of Reactive Capability Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
Figure 13-26. Example of Generator Bus Report, On-line Plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
Figure 13-27. Example of Machine Terminal Limits Report, Overloaded Machines Only . . . 13-26
Figure 13-28. Example of Branch Overload Report, Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
Figure 13-29. Example of Transmission Line Overload Report, Rate C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
Figure 13-30. Example of Transformer Overload Report, Default Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
Figure 13-31. Example of Branch Current Ratings Report, Default Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Figure 13-32. Example of Regulated Buses Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Figure 13-33. Example of Controlling Transformer Report, Violations Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
Figure 13-34. Example of Out-of-Limit Bus Voltage Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
Figure 13-35. Example of DC Network Conditions Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
Figure 13-36. Area Subsystem Selector Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
Figure 13-37. Owner Subsystem Selector Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
Figure 13-38. Zone Subsystem Selector Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
Figure 13-39. Specify psseexcel.accc Options Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
Figure 13-40. Export Data/Result to Excel Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
Figure 14-1.
Created Response File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Figure 14-2.
Select Program Automation File Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
xvi
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure 14-3.
Terminal Read Dialog for Automated Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Figure 14-4.
Automation Arguments Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Figure 14-5.
Insert Text into the Progress Stream Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Figure 15-1.
Report Output Destination Selector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Figure 15-2.
Define PATH Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Figure 16-1.
Scenario Editor Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Figure 16-2.
Select a File to Add to the Scenario Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Figure B-1.
Bus Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Figure B-2.
Machine Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Figure B-3.
Load Data Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Figure B-4.
Fixed Shunt Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Figure B-5.
Switched Shunt Data Record, Power Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Figure B-6.
Switched Shunt Data Record, Short Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Figure B-7.
Branch Data Record, Power Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Figure B-8.
Branch Data Record, Short Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Figure B-9.
Two Winding Transformer Data Record, Power Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Figure B-10. Two Winding Transformer Data Record, Short Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
xvii
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
xviii
PART 1: THE WORKING CASE
Chapter 1
Introduction
Chapter 1 - Introduction
1.1 Overview
The Siemens PTI Power System Simulator (PSSExpress) is a package of programs for studies of
power system transmission network and generation performance in both steady-state and dynamic
conditions. PSSExpress handles power flow, fault analysis (balanced and unbalanced), network
equivalent construction, and dynamic simulation. Using PSSExpress, the engineer can handle a
wide range of investigations for the planning and operation of modern electric power systems.
The PSSE Program Operation Manual is a comprehensive working guide to PSSExpresss
capabilities. It documents:
The operation and behavior of the various functional modules available in

PSSExpress.
The formats of the various input data files read by PSSExpress.
The output produced by PSSExpresss functional modules
This manual, the PSSExpress GUI Users Guide, describes the operation of PSS Express
through its Graphical User Interface (GUI). The GUI is the primary interface to PSSExpress; it
is also the interface through which new users are first exposed to PSSExpress. This manual is
structured to help the user become familiar with the available tools and the manner in which they
can be used for power system analytical investigations. It liberally references the PSSE Program
Operation Manual and other manuals supplied with the PSSExpress package (see PSSE
Documentation).
The functions and analyses available through the interface include:
Power flow and related network functions
One-line diagrams
Optimal power flow
Fault analysis
Dynamic simulation
Linear network analysis
Transmission pricing and open access
Network equivalencing
Program automation
1-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
Document Conventions
1.2 Document Conventions

The following conventions are used in PSSExpress manuals:
Examples
Power Flow > Solution > Parameters
Description
Navigation path in a PSSExpress GUI menu
[Solution Parameters] dialog
Interactive dialog in Graphical User Interface (GUI)
[Spreadsheet]
[Diagram]
SOLV,OPT
Interface windows and views
LIST
User entry the line mode in the Command Line Interface

(CLI) dialog
[F10], [Enter]
Keys found on a standard computer keyboard
[OK], [ ], [Close]
Action buttons available on a dialog
GUI toolbar button that starts an activity sequence
Set tap ratios to Unity
Activity option
Print outaged branches
Program option
GENERATOR CONVERSION COMPLETED
Message sent to Progress tab
<quantity>, <bus number>
Variable in message sent to Progress tab
ENTER OUTPUT DEVICE CODE:
Line mode dialog request/response
Progress tab, Report tab
Activity results displayed in [Output] view

PSSExpress activity name with hyperlink to source
OPEN
information
Section 5.15.2, Figure 12-4
Cross-reference with hyperlink to source information
Creating a Power Flow Raw Data File
Short reference with hyperlink to source information
PSSE Program Operation Manual,
Section 18.14, Listing Saved Case or

Snapshot Files
Full reference with hyperlink to source information
Indicates report output example clipped to fit the page

PSSE Program Application Guide
PSSExpress manual reference

Indicates additional information of interest.
Indicates important information.

n.a.
Abbreviation meaning "not applicable".
1-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
Startup Options
1.3 Startup Options

Use one of the following methods to start the program:
From the Windows Start menu, select Programs > PSSE 32 > PSSExpress 32.
This is the default location as established during program installation. Other applications within suite of tools may also be initiated from the Windows Start menu.
From the Windows Explorer application, double-click the psse32.exe file.

C:\Program Files\PTI\PSSE32\PSSBIN is the default directory location of psse32.exe.
An alternate directory location may be specified during program installation.
From the Windows Start menu, select Programs > PSSE 32 >
PSSE-32 Command Prompt and enter psse32.exe (or simply psse32) at the DOS
prompt, followed by [Enter]. See PSSE Program Operation Manual Section 3.2.1,
Startup Command Options for arguments that may be used in the startup sequence.
These arguments may be appended to the psse32.exe path name specified in the Target field of the [Properties] window, opened by right-clicking on the PSSExpress
desktop shortcut icon (see Figure 1-1).
Start a PSSE-32 Command Prompt and type prog params where:

prog = name of program (e.g., IPLAN32) that is to be executed.
params = whatever start-up parameters are appropriate for the program.
Double-click a previously defined PSSExpress shortcut icon located on the desktop.

Do not try to close the copyright window that opens during PSSExpress-32 startup.
1-3
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
Establishing the Working Directory
1.4 Establishing the Working Directory

PSSExpress always operates out of a working directory. By default, this is the EXAMPLE subdirectory under its main directory. You are not restricted to this directory or, for that matter, to a single
working directory. Refer to PSSE Program Operation Manual, Section 2.1, Directories and Files
Overview.
A simple way to administer a variety of working directories is to create a shortcut icon for each one.
Alter the properties of the shortcut to indicate the directory in which the program is to start. In
Figure 1-1 the directory path specified in the Start in: field may be set to an alternate location.
Startup Option
Argument for
Number of Buses
Working
Directory
Figure 1-1. Properties Dialog
1-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
Changing Program Preferences
1.5 Changing Program Preferences

Edit > Preferences
The [Program Preferences] dialog allows the specification of options when either [Spreadsheet]
or [Diagram] is active.
1-5
Introduction
1-6
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure 1-2. Program Preferences Dialog
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
The dialog (Figure 1-2) contains several groups of options, as defined in the following table.
Preference Type
Enabled Options
Create a new tab for every report
Output Options
Limit output windows to <number> lines of text
Automatically save the case every <number> minutes
Auto-Save option
Use the case name to Auto-Save, rather than PsseTempSave.sav
Automatically number buses, lines, and equipment
Auto bus and equipment
numbering
If you create a new case, this option automatically numbers the buses
as they are added, starting with the Initial bus number and incrementing subsequent buses as specified.
Upon changing IDs, update all open diagrams
Changing an ID in [Spreadsheet] automatically changes an ID in
[Diagram].
Allow single-click deletion of a bus and all its equipment
A specified bus on a diagram is deleted, along with all its equipment, either
by using the [Delete] key or selecting Delete from the right-click menu.
Allow drag panning of the diagram
The mouse pointer turns to Pan mode when the left mouse button is clicked
on the diagram, held down, and dragged. If disabled, a selection box is
formed around that portion of the diagram.
Zoom GOUT/GEXM to extents
A bus that is displayed in the diagram using the GOUT/GEXM activity will
fill the entire [Diagram] area.
Only Grow in-service items
Diagram interactions
Only those items currently in-service will be drawn during a Grow operation.
Only Grow items in current bus subsystem
Only those items in the current bus subsystem will be drawn during a
Grow operation.
Use Bus Location file to Grow items
If a Bus Location file has been opened, any Grow or Auto-Draw operations
will use the Bus Location file when placing buses on the diagram.
Display Circuit IDs on all lines with IDs/Names
Circuit IDs are displayed for every line in [Diagram] that is bound to a line
in [Spreadsheet].
Allow Grow from GOUT/GEXM
A diagram generated from GOUT/GEXM can run the Grow operation. This
method is not the same as the auto draw grow method. When the user
specifies the Grow operation for a bus, all lines connected to it and all buses
connected to those lines are drawn. In other words, Grow in GOUT redraws
the specified bus.
1-7
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
Preference Type
Enabled Options
Default Bind mode setting
Diagram items are bound to network items OR
Diagram items are NOT bound to network items
When creating a one-line diagram, the addition of network items into

[Diagram] also populate [Spreadsheet] with data as you build a
new network. Otherwise, the new network items display only in
[Diagram].
Default GOUT/GEXM font
Select a font for labels created in GOUT/GEXM diagrams.
Default Bus Height
Diagram interactions
(continued)
Specify length of the bus, in inches, when either Auto-Draw or Grow operations are in effect in a one-line diagram.
Default Grow Spacing
Specify distance between buses, in inches, when either Auto-Draw or Grow
operations are in effect in a one-line diagram.
Use Dialogs to edit Diagram Items
When this option is selected, double-clicking a network item in either
[Diagram] or [Network Tree] will pop up a dialog to use to edit the data,
rather than jumping to the appropriate spreadsheet entry.
Resize buses on one end only
When selected in the Diagram view, buses will resize from one end only, not
both ends.
Bus data format options:
Always use NUMBERS mode when reading RAW files OR
Always use NAMES mode when reading RAW files OR
General options
Always prompt me when reading RAW files

The option for manual specification of bus names or bus numbers whenever
a Power Flow Raw Data File is read into the working case opens the
[Read Power Flow Raw Data] dialog, where the For input, use bus
names option may be selected when specifying the PSSExpress version
number that created the RAW file.
Always prompt to save modified files

Configuration file text
editor
Open the directory of executable files (*.exe) to select a text editor that can be
launched wherever an input configuration text file is specified. If a text file editor
is specified, all the [Edit...] buttons used to edit configuration files in the various
dialogs will be enabled.
1-8
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
Defining the Program Size
1.6 Defining the Program Size

The PSSE Program Operation Manual, Section 3.3.1, Specifying the Maximum Number of Buses
describes the dimensional capacities of the various elements at standard size levels. The default
bus size level, established during program installation, is defined at startup.
An alternate size level may be specified by selecting Misc > Change program settings (OPTN), and
entering the desired size level in the Startup bus dimension field. The new bus size level will take
effect [OK] is clicked. An alternative is to specify the -buses <number of buses > argument (see
Figure 1-1).
When opening a Saved Case File, activity CASE automatically redimensions PSSExpress if the
Saved Case exceeds PSSExpresss current capacity limits.
1-9
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
Changing Program Settings
1.7 Changing Program Settings

Activity OPTN
Misc > Change program settings (OPTN)
Most PSSExpress calculation and reporting functions recognize one or more program settings.
When PSSExpress is installed on the system, default program settings are established; see
[Program Settings] dialog in Figure 1-3. Refer to PSS E Program Operation Manual,
Section 3.3.3, Program Run-Time Option Settings.
1.7.1 Extended Bus Names

When the Bus input option Extended Name is enabled in [Program Settings], extended bus names
must be specified in data fields designating buses on PSSExpress activity dialogs. The extended
bus name is formed by concatenating the 12-character bus alphanumeric name and the bus base
voltage. The various selectors available by clicking [Select...] next to these input fields honor the
Bus input option setting.
The requirements to specify an extended bus name are:
1. It must be enclosed in single quotes.
2. The twelve-character bus name, including any trailing blanks, must be the first twelve
characters.
3. The bus base voltage in kV must immediately follow the bus name. Up to six characters may
be used.
T h u s , v a l i d f o r m s o f a n e x te n d e d b u s n a m e i n c l u d e ' a a a a a a a a a a a a v v v v v v ' a n d
'aaaaaaaaaaaavvv'.
See PSSE Program Operation Manual, Extended Bus Names for details on the use of extended
bus names in Power Flow Raw Data Files. Note that the use of extended bus names in these files
is governed by an option of the input activity; it is independent of the Bus input option setting.
1-10
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
1-11
Introduction
Figure 1-3. Program Settings Dialog
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
See PSSE Program Operation Manual Section 18.10, Changing PSSE Program
Settings for field definitions.
1-12
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
Displaying and Resetting Timing Statistics
1.8 Displaying and Resetting Timing Statistics

Activity TIME
Misc > Display timing statistics (TIME)
This activity obtains and displays execution time statistics during a work session. It initializes a timer
and routes a message to the Progress tab. For example:
FRI, MAY 21 2004 08:36 - TIMER INITIALIZED
On subsequent runs of this activity, a summary of elapsed time, in seconds, since the previous run
and cumulative times from the point at which the timers were last initialized are printed. In addition,
two additional system statistics are printed, one of which indicates CPU utilization. The output is
displayed in the following format:
FRI, MAY 21 2004 15:21
SINCE LAST "TIME"
CUMULATIVE
ELAPSE
XX.XXX
XX.XXX
USER
XX.XXX
XX.XXX
KERNEL
XX.XXX
XX.XXX
The timing process is not sensitive to any interrupt control code options.
At any time during a work session in PSS Express, if Misc > Reset timing statistics to zero
(TIME,INIT) is selected, the timers are initialized and the same initialization message is sent to the
Progress tab.
1-13
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
The User Interface
1.9 The User Interface

The interface provides the following components (see Figure 1-4):
Tree View: All network items are represented as selectable elements in a hierarchical
list. Items in the list are organized by data type and are displayed in expandable/collapsible folders.
Spreadsheet View: Importing a power flow case file or raw data file populates the
spreadsheet with network data. Tabs along the bottom of the [Spreadsheet] allow
specification of the various data categories.
Output View: Progress, alerts/warnings, and report tabs are displayed in this expandable window. Alerts and warnings also appear in red text in the progress stream.
Diagram View: Creates one-line diagrams in Slider format. In addition to showing

power flow results, [Diagram] facilitates the building of new diagrams and networks
bus by bus. For existing power flow cases, this view enables the growing of one-line
diagrams by automatically drawing specified buses and all their equipment and connected buses. [Diagram] view opens only when a diagram is opened or created.
Toolbars: Allows convenient selection of analytical tools, creation of one-line diagrams, generation of reports, specification of subsystems, and view management.
Main Menu: Provides access to file handling, interface views, analytical functions,
automation tools, I/O formatting, toolbar organization and online help.
Status Bar: Provides information related to the diagram status and operating mode.
Command Line Interface (CLI) Window: Provides a field for command line input and
a pull-down list for reviewing command history. Another pull-down list provides selection of the desired command language.
Each analytical activity is available directly from pull-down menus and user-customizable toolbars.
With some exceptions, the functional activities of the old interface exist in the new interface. For
convenience, the traditional activity names are shown on many of the menu items.
All view windows can be individually re-sized and located anywhere on the interface between
the Status bar and the toolbars. The user can open and close (hide) [Tree], [Output], and
[Command Line] and the Status bar by toggling the View menu items. An alternative way to close
the view is to right-click within the view and select the Hide option. Right-clicking in [Tree] or
[Output] brings up a menu with Allow Docking option. Toggling this option ON and OFF allows the
corresponding view to float as a window or be docked to the main window. When undocked, the two
views can be moved at will and resized. [Diagram] and [Spreadsheet] cannot be undocked but
can be controlled using the standard Windows controls (i.e., Minimize, Maximize, Move, etc.).
1-14
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Tree View
Command Line
Interface (CLI)
Introduction
The User Interface
Main Menu
Output Tabs
Toolbars
Output View
Diagram View
Spreadsheet View
Status Bar
Figure 1-4. Key Elements of the Interface

The default view arranges [Diagram] and [Spreadsheet] views in a stack. Data changes can be
made only on the active window, that is, the top view. Click the appropriate button to make the
desired view active (see Figure 1-5).
1-15
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
The User Interface
OPF
Spreadsheet
Network
Spreadsheet
Model
Spreadsheet
Dynamics
Spreadsheet
Slider
Diagram
Dynamics
Plot Sheet
Event
Spreadsheet
Figure 1-5. View Activation Buttons

For convenience, Appendix A of this manual provide summaries of the toolbar options. A complete
description of [Spreadsheet] may be found in Chapter 2, [Diagram] in Chapter 3, and [Tree] in
Chapter 4.
The Status bar displays explanatory text while you are using PSSExpress. For example, when
moving the mouse arrow over a toolbar button the function of that button is displayed in the left
portion of the Status bar.
[Output] is used to display program information, dialog, errors, and warning messages. It is also
used to display analysis output formatted as text reports.
Standard Microsoft Windows capabilities for selecting and copying text to the clip board or saving
it to an external file are supported in both views. This allows for easy transition between
PSSExpress and external applications such as Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Word.
The Copy/Paste functions relate to the type of window involved. Specifically, when you copy
or cut from [Diagram], you can only paste back into [Diagram]. When working from [Spreadsheet], when you copy a cell or group of cells, you can paste the results into [Spreadsheet] or an
outside application like Microsoft Excel. Further, you can copy a piece of your network from a
diagram into PSSExpresss clipboard, you are allowed to copy a collection of cells from a Spreadsheet view into PSSExpress clipboard at the same time; PSSExpress will keep track of both
copies. Afterwards, when you paste back onto the spreadsheet or an external application like
Notepad, the software will know to paste the copied data from the spreadsheet. If you paste on the
diagram, the software will paste the copied data from the diagram.
1-16
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
The User Interface
1.9.1 Using the Command Line
View > CLI Window
Many users remain faithful to the origins of PSSExpress when the Command Line Interface (CLI)
was used for all interactive dialogs with the program. Command line input continues to be available
by selecting this menu option. The resulting command line input window supports the use of legacy
PSSExpress activity names, batch (BAT_) commands, and Python commands (see Figure 1-6).
Line Mode commands entered in the Command Line Interface (CLI) are handled by a Line
Mode Interpreter (LMI); Batch Commands are handled by the Batch Command interpreter,
and Python Commands are passed to the embedded Python interpreter. When using the
Line Mode, prompts are provided that resemble the traditional Line Mode prompts; when
an activity is completed the "Activity?" prompt is presented. When an incomplete Batch
Command is entered, a prompt of the form API-name: is presented.
To enter batch commands or activity names, select PSSExpress Response from the pull-down
list.
} Program Response
Command Input
List of Previous
Commands
Command
Language
Selection
Figure 1-6. Command Line Interface Operation

An interactive session is run by typing in activity names and responding to program responses in
the traditional manner. The user input must be in the Enter command field. Program responses are
seen in the Progress tab.
Using the command line input field will lock out access to some aspects of the program until the
current command being executed is completed. The lock out aspect depends on the API being
invoked.
Re-selecting View > CLI Window closes [Command Line]. If the Auto-Save option has been specified in [Program Preferences], the Progress tab displays the time saved and location of the saved
case.
The manual PSS E Command Line Interface (CLI) Users Guide describes the operation of
PSSExpress using its command line interface.
1-17
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
Creating a Working Case
1.10 Creating a Working Case

Selecting File > New facilitates the creation of a new diagram, a new power flow case, a new
diagram and power flow case, or a plot sheet. Figure 1-7a shows the [New] dialog.
If a Network case option is specified, then the [Build New Case] dialog opens for initiation of data
input (Figure 1-7b). After the system Base MVA is entered and two (optional) Heading lines are
input, a blank [Spreadsheet] view is displayed. A new case can be built entirely in [Spreadsheet]
or jointly with [Diagram] (see Chapter 2 and Chapter 3).
(a)
(b)
Figure 1-7. New and Build New Case Dialogs

The system stores the heading lines as comments if the case is exported. They are used to
document the case.
A new working case can be created merely by typing data elements directly into a blank
spreadsheet. This method would typically be limited to only small cases or to establish a small
network model into which significantly more data could be pasted into or imported.
1-18
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
Data Input
1.11 Data Input

The representation of power networks in PSSExpress comprises several data categories of
network and equipment elements, each of which requires a particular type of data. The data categories and the order in which they are input are described in the PSSE Program Operation
Manual, Section 5.2.1, Power Flow Raw Data File Contents. In addition to the basic data set
describing the network elements, PSSExpress requires other data and control element files for
specific applications. Not all the data described in Part 2: PSSExpress Activities are needed for
all applications, and some data can be defaulted.
The bulk power flow data input facility File > Open imports hand-typed power flow source data from
a correctly formatted Power Flow Raw Data File (.raw) and enters it into the power flow working
case, rearranging it from its original format into a computationally oriented data structure in the
process (see Section 6.3) .
All data is read in free format with data items separated by a comma or one or more blanks. Tabbed
delimited data items are not recommended. The File > Open selection may also import binary
saved case files (*.sav) containing power flow data as well as solution values and related options
(see Section 6.1).
A list of all data formats available for input into a new case follows. [Spreadsheet] cells are populated by each data set automatically, according to PSSExpress activity requirements.
Saved Case file (*.sav)
Section 10.1
Slider Binary file (*.sld)
Section 3.15
Power Flow Raw Data file (*.raw)
Section 10.4
Power Flow Data file, Options (*.raw)
Section 6.4, Section 6.3.2
Dynamics Snapshot Data file (*.snp)
Section 20.6
Dynamics Model Raw Data file (*.dyr)
Section 20.1
Add Dynamics Model Data (*.dyr)
Section 20.1.1
Dynamics Snapshot Raw Data file (*.srs)
Section 20.3
Bus Location Data file (*.loc)
Section 3.6.8
Sequence Data file (*.seq)
Section
Optimal Power Flow Data file (*.rop)
Section 19.7
Transactions Raw Data file (*.mwm)
SECTION DELETED
Machine Impedance Data file (*.rwm)
Section 10.3
Slider XML file (*.sldxml)
Section 3.15
Ucte Data file (*.uct)
UCTE Data Exchange Format Application Guide and Manual
Event Study file (*.evs)
Section 25.1
Channel Output file (*.out)
Section 20.4
1-19
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Introduction
Data Input
1.11.1 Resetting Dialog Options

Edit > Reset all dialog options to defaults
During operation of PSSExpress, the last used options specified in each dialog are saved.
However, the user may want to go back to the default dialog options but does not remember what
they are. This function restores all options specified in the dialog boxes to their respective defaults.
1.11.2 Closing the Application

File > Exit
This function closes the application. If the default option Always prompt to save modified files is
enabled in [Program Preferences], you will see a prompt requiring confirmation to save changes
to the working case. If this option is disabled, all files are closed without saving, regardless of their
status, modified or un-modified. This setting is preserved between from the current work session to
the next.
1-20
Chapter 2
Spreadsheet View
Chapter 2 - Spreadsheet View
2.1 Introduction
All network data components (e.g., buses, lines, loads) are represented on worksheet-style tabs in
[Spreadsheet] view. At program startup [Spreadsheet] is displayed only after a raw data or saved
case file is opened.
Pencil Icon
(Working Case Not Updated)
Tab Scroll
Column
Right-Click Menu
Cell
Right-Click Menu
Network
Component Tabs
Data Record Columns
Spreadsheet
Scroll Bars
Figure 2-1. Spreadsheet View
2-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Spreadsheet View
Introduction
Spreadsheets are constructed to display data in arrangements that are convenient to review and
modify for specific PSSExpress activities. Although many of the column headings are abbreviated
for easier scanning, the following lists are unabbreviated.
[Network Spreadsheet] is the default view for the interface and remains open once it is populated.
Tabs are provided to review and modify data for the following network component types:
Bus
Plant
Machine
Load
Fixed Shunt
Switched Shunt
Branch
Breaker/Switch
2-Winding Transformer
Impedance Table
FACTS Device
2-Terminal dc Line
VSC dc Line
Multi-terminal dc Line
Area
Inter-area Transfer
Owner
Zone
Multi-section Line
Mutual Coupling
For more information, refer to Section 2.3, Network Spreadsheet.
2-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Spreadsheet View
Editing and Formatting the Spreadsheet
2.2 Editing and Formatting the Spreadsheet

ITo record data changes made in spreadsheet cells, either point to another row or press
[Enter]. The pencil symbol disappears.
IIf a column is grayed out on a spreadsheet tab, the cells cannot be modified from this location.
For instance, a bus number can be changed using the Bus tab on the Network Spreadsheet,
but it cannot be changed from the Plant, Machine, Load, etc., tabs. Read-only columns can be
changed to a different color, if desired (see Set column style option below).
2.2.1 Menu Options

The right-click menu supports standard Windows commands, such as copy and paste actions.
Multiple rows can be selected by holding the [Shift] key to include all rows dragged or holding the
[Ctrl] key to select row-by-row. It is possible to copy and paste data to and from another application,
such as Microsoft Excel.
Figure 2-2. Spreadsheet Column Right-Click Menu

Bus numbers and other identifiers are not copied as this would result in duplicate data items
in the network. Instead, the next available unused identifier is placed in the field. If the copied
area exceeds the number of rows available, PSSExpress will automatically create the extra network
elements required (and generate appropriate bus numbers).
The column heading right-click menu (Figure 2-2) provides access to the [Find] and [Replace]
dialogs (also available through the Edit Menu).
Sorting and filtering capabilities are provided to increase usability, especially with large systems.
Any data edits performed within a filtered spreadsheet will automatically be reflected in the
original unfiltered sheet. This allows the use of a reduced data set on which to perform edits.
Spreadsheet appearance and data entry precision can also be customized using this menu. Highlight the entire column to use these features.
Set column style opens the [Cells] dialog (Figure 2-3), with tabs to change the font, color, and
border of the cells in the highlighted column. Set column precision opens an option list that permits
data precision up to 6 decimal places.
2-3
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Spreadsheet View
Figure 2-3. Cells Dialog

Color coding as a data visibility option is also available for those columns that are grayed out,
that is, not available for edit on a particular worksheet. However, only the appearance of the
column changes; the data record can be edited only from the appropriate worksheet (for example,
Bus Number from the Bus tab; Pgen from the Machine tab).
The toolbar options to zoom in/out and return to 100% are active in [Spreadsheet], although magnification about 150% becomes illegible unless the row height is also increased.
The right-click menu for bus data records also contains the option Create bus display (GOUT/GEXM).
Refer to Section 3.11, Creating a Bus Display for details.
File Menu options include options to set up printing formats for the spreadsheet data. See
Section 2.2.5, Print Setup for details.
In order to access File Menu options, [Spreadsheet] must be the active view. Click in any cell
to make it active if the desired option does not appear in the menu.
2-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Spreadsheet View
2.2.2 Managing Columns

For data spreadsheets that contain a large number of columns it may be useful to lock the identification fields in place when scrolling to view the other columns. Highlight the columns and select
Edit > Freeze Columns. Use Edit > Unfreeze Columns to undo the action.
Some data columns may hold data that is of little or no importance to the analysis the user is doing.
In order to help the user organize the column so they can be viewed easily,
Columns can be hidden from view if they are not important to the current analysis. Highlight the
columns and select Edit > Hide Columns. Use Edit > Unhide Columns to unhide all columns that were
previously hidden.
To rearrange the order of the columns, highlight the column and drag it. While the column is being
dragged, a red line indicates where the column will be dropped when the mouse button is released.
To reset [Spreadsheet] to the default layout, select Edit > Reset Active Spreadsheet or Edit > Reset
All Spreadsheets, as appropriate.
2.2.3 Header/Footer Setup

File > Spreadsheet Header/Footer Setup
The [Header / Footer] dialog (Figure 2-4) provides settings for header and footer spacing, the
alignment, page numbering and the style, size and other font characteristics. If the Save settings to
profile option is enabled, then the saved profile will be activated at the next PSSExpress work
session.
Figure 2-4. Spreadsheet Header / Footer Dialog
2-5
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Spreadsheet View
2.2.4 Page Setup

File > Spreadsheet Page Setup
The [Page Setup] dialog (Figure 2-5) provides settings for margins and grid lines. If the Save
settings to profile option is enabled, then the saved profile will be activated at the next
PSSExpress work session.
Figure 2-5. Spreadsheet Page Setup Dialog
2-6
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Spreadsheet View
2.2.5 Print Setup

File > Print Setup
The [Print Setup] dialog (Figure 2-6) is a standard Windows dialog.
Figure 2-6. Print Setup Dialog

The File > Print Preview action provides view options of each page, using the [Next Page] button,
and [Zoom] options from full page view to 100%. To return to [Spreadsheet] without printing, press
the keyboard [Esc] key.
2-7
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Spreadsheet View
Network Spreadsheet
2.3 Network Spreadsheet

[Network Spreadsheet] is synchronized with the bus subsystem selector (see Figure 2-9) so that
a subset of the data can be viewed during a work session. It can be minimized, but you cannot close
it unless you close the working case.
As shown in Figure 2-7, the Bus tab is the default worksheet; it displays the bus data records in the
working case. Data records corresponding to each instance of the following network elements are
available on separate tabs for review and modification:
Bus
Breaker/Switch
N-Terminal dc Line
Plant
Area
Machine
Inter-area Transfer
Load
Impedance Table
Owner
Fixed Shunt
FACTS Device
Zone
Switched Shunt
2-Terminal dc Line
Multi-section line
Branch
VSC dc Line
Mutual Coupling
Figure 2-7. Network Spreadsheet View, Bus Tab

Network elements may be added, modified, or deleted in the appropriate worksheet. If a subsystem
selector has been activated to reduce the amount of network data presented at any one time, readonly fields are colored light gray to distinguish them from editable fields. See Section 2.3.2, Creating
a Bus Subsystem and Section 2.3.3, Using the Subsystem Menu.
2-8
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Spreadsheet View
Network Spreadsheet
2.3.1 Revising the Working Case

In order to revise the working case using [Network Spreadsheet], it must be the active view.
Choose the most convenient way to make it active from among the following options:
Toolbar selection
Double-clicking the item to be revised in [Network Tree] or [Diagram]
Most data fields may be edited directly by clicking in the cell and entering in the desired value. Editable area, owner, and zone cells have [Area Selection], [Owner Selection], and [Zone Selection]
dialogs available by double-clicking in the cell.
Data fields that contain check boxes (for example, in-service, metered, and auto-adjust options) are
considered to be enabled when checked and disabled when unchecked.
Some data cells require specification from a list of valid entries (for example, I/O code for a winding,
impedance, or admittance). Clicking in the cell displays a pull-down list from which one value may
be specified.
2.3.2 Creating a Bus Subsystem

A bus subsystem can be created directly from the bus data spreadsheet by highlighting the bus data
records to be included and selecting the Create bus subsystem option from the right-click menu
(Figure 2-8a). [Spreadsheet] will then show only that bus subsystem (Figure 2-8b).
a.
b.
Figure 2-8. Creating a Bus Subsystem
2-9
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Spreadsheet View
Network Spreadsheet
2.3.3 Using the Subsystem Menu
Subsystem > Bus
A bus subsystem can also be created using the [Bus Subsystem Selector] dialog (Figure 2-9).
Using this method, a subsystem can be built using filters by area, owner, zone, base kV, or bus
numbers. Each category is available on a separate tab. For Areas, Owners, Zones, and Buses use
the appropriate lists to specify the subsystem. Click [Reset] to return all entries in the Selected list
to the Unselected list.
The Buses tab provides a [Filter] button that opens the [Filter Bus Subsystem Selection] dialog
(Figure 2-10), an additional mechanism to exclude buses from the selection process in very large
systems.
Figure 2-9. Bus Subsystem Selector Dialog
2-10
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Spreadsheet View
Network Spreadsheet
Figure 2-10. Filter Bus Subsystem Selection Dialog

After specifying the subsystem, click [Apply]. The tab with a specified subsystem will be marked
with an asterisk (for example Buses * ) until the selected component is returned to the unselected
list.
Click [Memorize] to preserve a specific subsystem for later recollection. The [Save As] dialog
requires entering a filename for the Bus Subsystem file (*.sbs).
Click [Recall] to open a saved Bus Subsystem file (*.sbs).
Click [OK] to close the dialog and refresh [Spreadsheet]. Only data corresponding to the
subsystem is displayed, until a new subsystem selection is made.
To return the entire working case to [Spreadsheet], select Subsystem > Bus and select the All
buses check box from [Bus Subsystem Selector] or click the ALL BUS icon.
2-11
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Spreadsheet View
Network Spreadsheet
Subsystem > Primary bus subsystem
This function toggles between two subsystems. Under normal operation, only one subsystem is
created at a time. However, a second subsystem will be created when, in [Diagram], information is
requested for an element that is not in the current subsystem. The creation of the second
subsystem allows the first subsystem to be preserved.
2-12
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Spreadsheet View
Exporting Spreadsheet Data
2.4 Exporting Spreadsheet Data
File > Export > Spreadsheet Tab to text file
This activity exports all data from an open spreadsheet to a tab-delimited file. The file selection
window in the [Save As] dialog lists only Text Files (*.txt). Specify the filename; this can be a new
file or a previously-built file to be over-written.
2-13
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Spreadsheet View
Undoing an Action
2.5 Undoing an Action

Edit > Undo Record
This action returns a PSSExpress operation to its state previous to the run of an automation file
(see Section 14.3, Executing Automation Files). It is necessary when adding a new record to any
of the spreadsheets and the application generates an error message about missing information. At
certain points, this can lead to application lockup. The Add operation cannot continue until the
missing data is provided and the missing data cannot be provided because the application keeps
notifying the user of the problem. At this point, Edit > Undo Record will reset the application back to
the state before the Add operation was begun. The missing data can then be added in other spreadsheets and the item added again. Once the data has been entered, however, the Undo Record
operation will have no effect.
2-14
Chapter 3
Diagram View
Chapter 3 - Diagram View
3.1 Introduction
[Diagram] view (Figure 3-1) is used to create and modify one-line diagrams and to display a variety
of results, such as:
Power flow results (Section 3.8)
Network impedances (Section 3.9)
Graphical differences between power flow cases (Section 3.10)
Fault analysis results (Section 3.11)
To open [Diagram], open an existing diagram (File > Open > Slider Binary file (*.sld)), or begin a
new diagram (File > New > Diagram).
As you add new elements to a diagram, [Network Spreadsheet] (Chapter 2) and [Network Tree]
(Chapter 4) are automatically updated to reflect the addition. To move from [Diagram] to [Network
Spreadsheet], double-click the desired diagram component. [Network Spreadsheet] opens to the
specified data tab and highlights the row of data for that component.
3-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Introduction
Figure 3-1. Diagram View with Slider Diagram
3-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Specifying Diagram Properties
3.2 Specifying Diagram Properties

Diagram > Properties
The [Diagram Properties] dialog (Figure 3-2), available only when [Diagram] is the active view,
supports user-configurable settings, such as units, background colors, grid spacing, and zoom / pan
thresholds.
Figure 3-2. Diagram Properties Dialog

Labels: Select from a variety of font styles, sizes and colors for labels. Options for hiding or showing
all labels and hiding results labels are also available. Click [ ] to open the [Color] dialog
(Figure 3-3) or click [Font] to open the [Font] dialog (Figure 3-4) to change label color or font.
3-3
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Figure 3-3. Color Dialog
Figure 3-4. Font Dialog
3-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Grid: An underlying grid pattern may be made visible. Line style and width, grid spacing, and snap
distance, may be specified. For very dense diagrams the snap distance must be small enough to
ensure that items snap to the desired grid point instead of one further away.
General Colors: Defines background, grid, and port colors. Click [ ] to open the [Color] dialog
(Figure 3-3).
The port symbol is a small circle that appears at a location where a line or equipment connects
to a bus. Ports appear as connection points when selecting lines or equipment and move to
the new bus location when changes are made from [Diagram].
Network Items Colors: Defines colors for bound and unbound diagram items and power flow direction. Click [ ] to open the [Color] dialog (Figure 3-3).
All network items in [Diagram] that represent real network data are drawn in the bound color
Section 3.6.4), unless the color has been over-ridden by range checking coloration (Figure 3-46).
All network items added to a diagram that do not represent data in the network are drawn in the
unbound color.
The P flow arrow and the Q flow arrow display animated flow directions for real and reactive power
for power flow results (Figure 3-46).
Precision: Defines the number of decimal places to be used in representing power flow and short
circuit results on a diagram.
Zoom/Pan: Enter values for zoom factors directly in the fields provided. In addition, it is possible to
hide some diagram items when the zoom factor is small and the diagram becomes crowded,
including the handles that appear at each end of a bus when it is selected.
These values set limits. The diagram can be expanded, reduced and panned using the Zoom
Toolbar buttons. Computers equipped with a mouse-wheel can pan vertically using just the
mouse-wheel. Holding down the [Shift] key while moving the mouse-wheel will pan horizontally.
Holding down the [Ctrl] key while moving the mouse-wheel will zoom. Keyboard arrow keys may
also be used to pan the image.
Image File Directory: Click [ ] to open the dialog specifying a default path for commonly used
images. These images may be imported to the background layer of [Diagram].
3-5
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Figure 3-5. Select Directory for Image Files Dialog

Printing: Three options are available for printing a diagram:
As seen on the screen: WYSIWYG (What you see is what you get.) prints only the visible portion of the one-line diagram. If you have zoomed in to see greater detail, this
might be only a portion of a bus. Verify the desired print area by selecting File > Print
Preview.
Fit the whole diagram to page: The entire one-line diagram is printed on one page,
independent of whether or not the entire diagram is shown in [Diagram].
Multi-page: The entire diagram is printed on multiple pages, independent of whether or

not the entire diagram is visible in [Diagram]. In addition, a muiltiple-page diagram may
be scaled. This is useful when the one-line diagram is large.
The user must specify loading chart placement for 2-winding transformers from the following
options:
High current loading side
Low current loading side
Both sides
Other diagram options may be enabled using checkboxes. If Display Tooltips is enabled, moving
the mouse cursor over a diagram item opens a pop-up note that provides basic information, such
as bus number, name, and base kV.
3-6
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Creating a New Power Flow Case using Diagram View
3.3 Creating a New Power Flow Case using Diagram View

After starting a new case and creating a blank [Spreadsheet] (see Creating a Working Case),
select File > New and the Diagram option. Click [OK] to create a blank [Diagram]. Then network
elements can be added graphically instead of typing data into the spreadsheet.
The first task is to specify whether to number the buses automatically; see Changing Program Preferences. For example, select Edit > Preferences to open [Program Preferences], partially shown
in Figure 3-6. Here the buses are numbered starting at 1 in increments of 100.
The example built in this section will have:
A generator at bus 1 and bus 201.
A non transformer branch between bus 1 and 101.
A non transformer branch between bus 101 and 102.
A load at bus 101.
Figure 3-6. Example: Automatic Bus Numbering
3.3.1 Adding Buses
Vertical Bus
Horizontal Bus
To add buses to the diagram, and consequently the database, select a Bus toolbar button (vertical
or horizontal) in the Diagram toolbar. Click [Diagram] in those locations where the buses are to be
placed. They can be moved and otherwise adjusted later. As buses are added to the diagram, they
will also be added to the spreadsheet with default values; in other words, they are bound to the
spreadsheet. Default values can be subsequently modified by editing in [Spreadsheet].
3-7
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Buses are added to Spreadsheet View

as they are added to the Diagram View
Bus Toolbar Button
Click Diagram View to add Buses
Figure 3-7. Adding Buses to the Database Using the Diagram View
3.3.2 Adding Network Elements
Branch
Breaker
Switch
Load
Generator
Switched Shunt
Fixed Shunt
FACTS Device
3-8
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
2-Terminal dc Line
VSC dc Line
With the buses roughly positioned, select the Branch button and drag the mouse between two
buses to represent branch connections. Select the Breaker button or the Switch button and drag
the mouse to a branch to represent these connections. Select the Load button and drag the mouse
from a bus to an adjacent empty area. Select the Generator button and drag the mouse between
two buses. Edit the data in [Spreadsheet] to change default values. Figure 3-8 summarizes an
example.
As each element is added, a summary of the case building activity is displayed in the Progress tab.
See Section 3.15, Closing the Diagram View for options to save the diagram.
3-9
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Adding a Branch
Adding a Line with a Breaker
Adding a Line with a Switch
Adding a Generator
Adding a Load
Figure 3-8. Adding Network Elements to the Diagram
3-10
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Opening or Importing Existing Diagram Files
3.4 Opening or Importing Existing Diagram Files

Diagram data may be supplied in one of two formats: the old PSSExpress DRAW format or the
new Slider file format created by the current version of PSSExpress, the file type that will be used
for future versions.
3.4.1 Slider Diagram File
File > Open
From the [Open] file selector window, select Slider Binary File (*.sld). Highlight the desired file and
click [Open]. The resulting diagram will be displayed in a new diagram window.
3.4.2 Importing a DRAW File

Activity DRAW
Requirements / Prerequisites
If bus voltages and/or line flows are to be printed, validly specified power flow case
solved to an acceptable mismatch tolerance.
Draw Data file (*.drw)
File > New
From the [New] dialog, select the Diagram option to create a blank [Diagram]. Then select File >
Import > DRAW file. A list of available *.drw files will be provided. Highlight the desired file and click
[Open].
DRAW coordinate data files cannot be opened using File > Open from the Main Menu.
The open DRAW file can be saved as a Slider Binary file (*.sld). Select File > Save As and rename
the file as a slider file.
Although existing PSSExpress DRAW files can be imported, diagrams can be saved only in
the slider format (*.sld). The new diagrams are not backward compatible with the
PSSExpress DRAW/DRED activities used to display and edit one-line diagrams in earlier versions
of PSSExpress.
3.4.3 Importing an Image File

File > Import > Image file
3-11
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Opening or Importing Existing Diagram Files
Image files may be imported into a diagram if they are formatted as *.bmp, *.jpg, *.gif, or *.png files.
From the [Import Image File] selector window, select the desired file type. Highlight the desired file
and click [Open]. The image will be displayed in the active diagram layer.
To assign image attributes, right-click the image and select Image Properties. The [Image Properties] dialog permits layer reassignment (see Section 3.13.3, Diagram Layers), scaling, and
options to select and move the image in the diagram as if it were a network element. However, there
is no network data associated with the image.
Figure 3-9. Image Properties Dialog
3-12
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Diagram Templates
3.5 Diagram Templates
Diagram templates can be used to build a library of common network configurations to be used over
and over when creating new network elements. The diagram template function was initially created
for use with the Substation Reliability Assessment (SRA) option.
As engineers add detailed bus/breaker/switch substation configurations to their networks for evaluation, the same configurations repeat over and over. The diagram template allows you to create
the basic substation configuration once and then use it to reproduce the substation repeatedly in
the network.
Diagram templates can be created using buses, branches, switches, breakers, loads etc. The
diagram template is created and saved without network data associated, only the topology of the
network elements is maintained (see Figure 3-10 for an example). When a diagram template is
inserted in a slider diagram, the network topology is created in the network and default data is
assigned to each new element.
Figure 3-10. Diagram Template, Double Bus and Single Breaker, 4 Circuits
3-13
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
3.6 Revising a Diagram

3.6.1 Using Data Records
Data record dialogs for individual network components may be used to revise the working case. To
activate the data record option, select Edit > Preferences, select Use Dialogs to edit Diagram
Items on the [Program Preferences] dialog, and click [OK] to update preferences. Thereafter, data
records are activated whenever a diagram component is double-clicked.
When all changes have been entered in the data record, click [OK] to update the data record in the
diagram and the network spreadsheet. When the working case is saved, the component data record
is permanently updated.
Data records are available for bus, machine, load, and branch data records starting with
PSSExpress-32. An inventory of currently available data records is provided in Appendix B.
3.6.2 Using Diagram Menus

Various menus are available by right-clicking in [Diagram], with or without a network item selected.
Selecting a network item and right-clicking opens a menu that is specific to the type of network
element selected. For example, selecting a bus and right-clicking opens the following menu
(Figure 3-11).
3-14
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Figure 3-11. Example of Diagram View Right-click Menu
3.6.3 Editing Functions

All cutting, copying and pasting actions in [Diagram] use the application diagram clipboard.
Diagram items placed on the application diagram clipboard may only be used in another [Diagram]
within the same instance of PSSExpress.
If the bind option is enabled (Section 3.6.4), all changes made in in [Diagram] are reflected
in [Network Spreadsheet].
Two options are available from the right-click menu:
Select All: Selects all items in the diagram.
3-15
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Select current bus subsystem: Select a network item to specify. This option selects all
items that are in that bus subsystem. If no bus subsystem has been specified, Select
All occurs.
The remaining right-click menu functions are sensitive to the bind option.
If the bind option has been enabled for Cut and Copy functions, both the graphic representation and
the corresponding model information are available from the diagram clipboard. If it has not been
enabled, only the graphic representation is available from the diagram clipboard.
If the bind option has been enabled for the Paste function, and the copied area exceeds the number
of existing elements, PSSExpress will automatically create the extra network elements required
(and generate appropriate bus numbers).
If the bind option has been enabled for the Delete function, all network elements removed from the
diagram are also removed from the working case.
Unless the edited diagram has been saved, Edit > Undo will reverse the last 30 actions, undoing
both [Diagram] and network changes.
To copy a diagram from PSSExpress to another application, such as Microsoft Word, the
system clipboard is used. Select Edit > Copy to clipboard. This action copies everything visible
in [Diagram] to the clipboard; the user cannot select specific elements. To paste the clipboard
contents to another application, use the paste function in that application. Note that the system copy
is a screen capture of the [Diagram] view; and if components have been highlighted, the handles
will be visible in the pasted copy.
3.6.4 Binding Data

Selecting Bind Items toggles the binding mode, where all selected diagram items are synchronized
with their associated network data.
When Bind Items is enabled, a check mark is displayed in the menu. If a network item is deleted in
the diagram, it will be deleted from the working case. Consequently, there will be no data displayed
in either [Network Tree] or [Network Spreadsheet]; and the item symbol will disappear from the
diagram. Similarly, if network items are pasted into [Diagram], then a corresponding network item
will be added to the working case and will appear in both [Network Tree] and [Network
Spreadsheet].
The Bind Items option also affects diagram elements deleted from [Network Tree]. The delete
action removes the network item from the working case and, consequently, from [Network Spreadsheet]. However, in [Diagram] the symbol representing the network item remains in view, but its
color changes to the previously specified unbound color, indicating that the item is no longer part of
the working case.
Conversely, if the Bind Items option is not selected when a diagram item is deleted, it is deleted only
from the diagram but remains part of the power flow case. It will thus still be available in both
[Network Tree] and [Diagram].
Network components drawn in [Diagram] that do not correspond to existing items in the network
will be displayed in an unbound item color. Network components drawn in [Diagram] that do correspond to existing items in the network will be displayed in bound item colors, unless over-ridden by
range checking coloration. Both the bound and unbound colors can be set by the user in the
[Diagram Properties] dialog (Section 3.2).
3-16
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
3.6.5 Displaying and Modifying Network Elements

Refresh: This right-click menu function redraws all items in the diagram.
Locate bus: The [Select Bus] dialog initiates a search for the location of a specified bus. If the
bus exists in the diagram, it is centered in [Diagram] and highlighted. If a requested bus is not in
the diagram, a pop-up message is displayed.
Figure 3-12. Select Bus Dialog

Display: Diagrams may be comprised of multiple layers, where each layer has an associated
display list, a list of graphical objects. Individual network items are drawn in display-list order. If it is
desirable to have a particular item drawn after or before another, for example, where two diagram
items occupy the same general area in [Diagram] and one needs to be drawn over the other, layers
become necessary. For each of the following functions, a network element must be highlighted.
Selecting Display > Bring to Front moves the specified item to the end of the display list.
This object is drawn last, on top of the other graphical objects in the same layer.
Selecting Display > Send to Back moves the selected item to the beginning of the display
list. This object is drawn first, and other items in the same layer should be drawn on top of
this network item.
Selecting Display > Center moves the specified item to the center of [Diagram].
Selecting Display > Assign to Layer opens the [Select Layer] dialog to move the selected
item to a predefined layer (see Figure 3-69).
Grouping: Diagram items may be grouped into logical units. These units can then be modified as a
single entity. Grouping items together is particularly helpful when moving a collection of diagram
elements. A group cannot consist of only one item.
Diagram items can belong to only one group at a time. If you attempt to reassign an item to another
group, it is removed from the existing group before being added to the new group. Define a block
to be grouped by dragging the mouse on a portion of the diagram. Or define the group one item at
a time by using [Ctrl]+ left-mouse-click to selectively add items to the group. Select Grouping >
Group to build a group out of all the specified diagram items.
To return a group to its individual items, highlight the group by clicking any item. Then select
Grouping > Ungroup.
The system manages annotations (labels) associated with a given device as if it were grouped
with the device. If the device is deleted, the related annotation is also deleted. If the selected
device is moved, the related annotation is also moved. Therefore, adding a device to a larger group,
in effect, adds all the related annotation to the larger group as well. This grouping behavior automatically moves annotations when the device is moved (called autopositioning), but can be disabled
3-17
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
by selecting Item Properties > Auto Position. When autopositioning is disabled, the annotation must
be explicitly selected to be added to the group during the grouping operation.
Labels: The user can show or hide diagram labels (also called annotations). In order to be activated,
the Labels > Toggle label selectability option is used to open the following dialog.
Figure 3-13. Make Labels Selectable Dialog
After selectability is activated, use the toggle button in the toolbar to show/hide the labels.
Manage Layers: The [Layers] dialog (Figure 3-67) provides the means to create layers for a
specified diagram. Each layer has its own Visibility options, as well as an option to turn selectability
on and off. See Section 3.13.3, Diagram Layers.
Manage Views: The [Saved Views] dialog (Figure 3-14) provides provides the means to create
and retrieve a variety of one-line diagram presentations. These may be desirable for re-displaying
unique views of the data, for example, results at different zoom levels from different parts of the
network. If specific views are needed on a regular basis, then those views can be stored for rapid
retrieval.
New
Delete
Move Up
Move Down
Figure 3-14. Saved Views Dialog

Click the new view icon, enter a name for the current view, and click [Save]. The title of the view
appears in the dialog list. Double-click the title to edit the view. Highlight the desired view and click
3-18
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
[Restore] to reposition the diagram to the saved view. Highlight the desired view and use the up
and down arrows to re-order the list. Any view except Default may be deleted.
Network Data: Highlight the desired network item and select this function to activate [Network
Spreadsheet], which displays the appropriate data tab and highlights the appropriate row. The data
can then be examined and manipulated as desired. Only one network item at a time may be
selected. See also Section 3.6.1, Using Data Records.
Create bus subsystem: Define a block to be defined by dragging the mouse on a portion of the
diagram and select this function to define a bus subsystem. Both [Spreadsheet] and [Network
Tree] will be updated to reflect the new subsystem sselection.
Diagram Annotation: This function opens the [Powerflow Data Annotation] dialog (Figure 3-44)
where diagram annotations (that is, branch, bus, equipment labels and diagram title) and diagram
range checking options can be set. These are described in Section 3.8.1 and Section 3.8.2.
Item Properties > Auto Position: If no network item is specified, this function opens the [Enable
Auto Position] dialog, where the auto-position mode for the entire diagram may be set. If only one
equipment item or annotation is specified (i.e. machine, load, capacitor), then the Auto Position
option can be toggled ON or OFF for the selected element.
If auto-positioning is enabled, the equipment or annotation connected to a bus will orient itself
perpendicular to the bus. Toggling this property OFF allows the diagram item to be positioned in any
orientation (see Figure 3-15).
Auto Position ON
Auto Position OFF
Figure 3-15. Impact of Auto-Positioning

Item Properties > Auto Relink: If no bus is specified, this function opens the [Enable Auto Relink]
dialog, where the auto-relink mode for all buses in the diagram may be set. If only one busbar/bus
node is specified, then the Auto Relink option can be toggled ON or OFF for the selected bus.
If auto-relinking is enabled, moving or re-sizing a busbar causes the attached branches and transformers to re-attach themselves for a perceived optimal representation. Toggling this property OFF
allows the busbar to be moved or re-sized without affecting the attachment of branches and
transformers.
Item Properties > Auto Rotate: When a non-bus item is specified, this function opens the [Enable
Auto Rotate] dialog, which allows equipment connected to the bus to rotate when the bus is
rotated. Toggling this property OFF keeps the original position of the equipment when the bus is
rotated.
Item Properties > Font: When a label (annotation) is specified, this function opens the [Font] dialog
(Figure 3-4) from which a new text font, style, and point size for the selected item and its result
labels can be applied.
Item Properties > Line Style / Color: When a line is specified, this function opens the [Line Style]
dialog (Figure 3-16) from which the line type (solid or dotted), width, and color may be changed.
This function may also be used to change the color of annotations or primitive shapes. Primitive
3-19
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
shapes include straight lines, arcs, circles, polygons, etc., available on the Diagram Toolbar with
the other network diagram elements.
Figure 3-16. Line Style Dialog

Item Properties > Visible: When a network item is specified, it may be made invisible using this function. The item is still available, as its handles appear when the location of the item is clicked. Thus,
an invisible network item may be made visible using this function.
Item Properties > Unbind: When one or more diagram elements are specified, they may be disassociated from the corresponding network item, overriding the previously enabled binding. In order
to re-establish binding, the network model item in [Network Tree] and the diagram element must
be reselected. Then select the Bind option from the [Network Tree] right-click menu.
Item Properties > Location: Certain diagram elements allow the specification of GIS coordinates.
This is useful for providing locations for network elements for use with Google Maps.
Item Properties > Map String: This is used to edit the mapping string used to associate a diagram
item with a specific network element. Most users will have no need to alter this field, but certain
Python APIs can be used to set and query these map strings and perform operations based on
results.
Item Annotation: When a network item is specified, an item-specific dialog provides the means to
change the way its annotation is displayed. For example, the [Bus Annotation Properties] dialog
(Figure 3-29) is displayed when the specified item is a bus. You may choose to apply the changes
to the specified bus or to all buses. See also Section 3.8.1, Power Flow Annotation, Section 3.9.1,
Impedance Annotation, Section 3.10.1, Comparison Annotation. The items at the bottom of the
[Diagram] right-click menu are customized to the element(s) selected. Figure 3-17 shows the difference between specifying one or two buses and lines. Other functions are available when another
type of equipment is selected (i.e., load, machine, etc). This sections provides a description of all
possible functions.
3-20
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Two Buses Selected

One Bus Selected
Load Selected
One or Two Lines Selected
Figure 3-17. Customized Right-Click Menu

Toggle bus symbol: This function toggles the specified bus between the busbar and busnode representations (see Figure 3-18).
Figure 3-18. Alternative Bus Symbols

Grow N Levels: The [Specify Grow Levels] dialog specifies a method for drawing elements
connected to the bus (see Section 3.7).
Split bus: The [Split Bus] dialog requires a new bus number, name and base kV for the additional
bus. Click [OK] to split the bus, preserving the existing one and adding the new one to the diagram.
Equipment and lines can then be dragged to the new bus. See also Section 7.4, Splitting Buses.
Join buses: This function is available when two buses have been specified. The [Join Buses]
dialog requires specification of an option to handle Line shunts of deleted in-service branches. Click
[OK] to join the two buses into a single retained bus. See also Section 7.3, Joining Buses.
Switch: This function changes the status of a network component. Visual representation of out-ofservice equipment is specified using [Powerflow Data Annotation] (see Section 3.8.2, Range
Checking). A summary of the change is routed to the Progress tab (Figure 3-19). When using this
function to disconnnect a bus, its type code is set to 4 and all ac branches, dc lines, and series
FACTS devices connected to the bus are represented as out-of-service.
Toggle load symbol: This function toggles the specified load symbol size.
3-21
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Bus and Associated Equipment

Removed from Service
Summary of Changes
Figure 3-19. Example of Switch Function to Out-of-Service

For bus connected capacitors and reactors the Switch option is not available. To switch the
status of capacitors and reactors, double-click the network item (or right-click and select
Network data) to edit the status field of the corresponding data record in [Spreadsheet].
Combine/Split Machines: This function is available when a single bus with at least one connected
machine is selected. When performed, it combines multiple machine diagram items at the bus into
a single summing machine symbol, where results are summed for total generation at the bus. A
summing machine symbol has no machine ID in the center of the symbol, whereas a machine
diagram item representing a single machine has a machine ID in the center of the symbol.
If only a summing machine symbol exists on the bus, selecting the bus and the Combine/Split
Machines function will remove the summing machine symbol and replace it with one or more
machine diagram items representing the individual machines at the bus.
Combine/Split Loads: This function is available when a single bus with at least one load is selected.
Its action is comparable to Combine/Split Machines, affecting the bus load.
Combine/Split Fixed Shunts: This function is available when a single bus with at least one fixed
shunt is selected. Its action is comparable to Combine/Split Machines, affecting the fixed shunt.
3-22
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Collapse buses towards high voltage bus: This function is available when two buses are selected.
It is used to visually change the layout in [Diagram], and has no effect on the actual network. When
performed, all components on the lower voltage bus appear to be connected to the high voltage bus,
and the lower voltage bus is removed, as well as any connections between the two buses. Only
[Diagram] is affected; these components are not removed from the actual network. If an analysis
is performed, all components of the two buses are included in the calculations.
Collapse buses towards low voltage bus: This function is available when two buses are selected. It
is used to visually change the layout in [Diagram], and has no effect on the actual network. When
performed, all components on the lower voltage bus appear to be connected to the low voltage bus,
and the higher voltage bus is removed, as well as any connections between the two buses. Only
[Diagram] is affected; these components are not removed from the actual network. If an analysis
is performed, all components of the two buses are included in the calculations.
Tap Line: This function is available when a line is selected. The [Tap Line] dialog requires specification of the tap location and identification of the new bus. Any nontransformer branch may be
tapped. Click [OK] to tap the line. See also Section 7.5, Tapping a Line.
Insert Breaker: This function is available when a line is selected. This is used to insert a dummy bus
node and a specially identified zero impedance line that is used to model a breaker in substation
reliability analysis. The [Insert a Breaker] dialog (Figure 3-20) requires specification of the dummy
bus created to build the breaker. Click [OK] to add the breaker.
Figure 3-20. Insert a Breaker Dialog
3-23
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Insert Switch: This function is available when a line is selected. This is used to insert a dummy bus
node and a specially identified zero impedance line that is used to model a switch in substation reliability analysis. The [Insert a Switch] dialog (Figure 3-21) requires specification of the dummy bus
created to build the switch.
Figure 3-21. Insert a Switch Dialog
3.6.6 Drawing a Missing Bus

If a bus is present in the working case but is not drawn in the active diagram, it is indicated in the
expanded [Network Tree] without the busbar symbol (see Figure 4-2). Right-clicking the missing
bus activates a Draw option. Selecting Draw from the pop-up menu draws the bus and all its equipment in the active [Diagram].
3.6.7 Renumbering Buses in the Diagram

File > Renumber Buses in Diagram (RNFI)
The Renumber Buses in Diagram option is available only when working in [Diagram]. It opens the
[Bus number translation file] selection window for the required Bus Number Translation file
(*.trn). The creation of this file is described in Section 7.15, Renumbering Buses. The file contains
records of old bus numbers and the corresponding new numbers.
3.6.8 Specifying Bus Locations from a File

File > Open
Loading a Bus Location Data File (*.loc) from the [Open] dialog allows the bus locations in the
diagram to be specified from the same Cartesian or GIS coordinates across repeated analyses or
different working case subsystem configurations.
File data is used to position any buses drawn or Grown for which an entry exists in the file. Those
buses in the working case that are not defined in the file are assigned default locations in the
diagram.
The same file is used to reposition buses in an existing diagram; select Diagram > Update bus locations after the file is loaded. If no Bus Location file has been loaded, this function is disabled. Buses
may be specified for repositioning. If buses are selected, only those buses will be evaluated for
update. If no buses are selected, all buses in the diagram will be evaluated for update.
3-24
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Bus Location Data File Contents

Bus positions on a diagram may be specified in a Bus Location file that can be accessed whenever
a bus is created. These positions can be specified as x/y coordinates or as GIS coordinates in an
hour, minutes, seconds format. The format of the file is as follows:
CARTESIAN | GEOPHYSICAL
The first record in the file describes the format of all bus position records. CARTESIAN
specifies that bus positions are provided as x/y locations on the diagram. GEOPHYSICAL
specifies that bus positions are provided in GIS form as two pairs of hour, minute, seconds
inputs.
The next N lines specify the bus positions. The Bus Location file does not require an entry for every
bus in the case. If a bus position record is not found in the file when positioning a bus on the
diagram, default bus positioning is used.
The format of a CARTESIAN bus position record is as follows:
BusId, X location, Y location, Rotation, Length
where:
BusId
Either a bus number or a quoted extended bus name.
X location
The bus X location, in inches, on the diagram.
Y location
The bus Y location, in inches, on the diagram.
Rotation
The optional bus rotation, in degrees.
Length
The optional length of the busbar, in inches.
The format of a GEOPHYSICAL bus position record is as follows:

BusId, X location, Y location, Rotation, Length
where:
BusId
Either a bus number or a quoted extended bus name.
X location
The bus X location, in degrees latitude (see format, below).
Y location
The bus Y location, in degrees longitude (see format, below).
Rotation
The optional bus rotation, in degrees.
Length
The optional length of the busbar, in inches.
Degrees are specified as a set of 1 to 3 real numbers (degrees, minutes, seconds) followed by a
direction (E, W, N, S) (the direction can be omitted if all three numbers are specified). Positive
values are interpreted as E or N, negative values as W or S. The degree parts can be separated by
spaces, commas, apostrophes, or by the specific unit markers for degree, minutes, or seconds (in
which case they must be used in order).
3-25
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
For example, the following all represent the same value:

793036W
-79 -30 -36
79.51W
-79.51,,,
The Bus Location file can also contain location entries for branches and two winding transformers
found in the network.
Branch and two winding transformers records are indicated by the BRANCH record appearing in
the file.
BRANCH
The format of a CARTESIAN branch position record is as follows:
FromBusId
Either a bus number or a quoted extended bus name of the from bus.
ToBusId
Either a bus number or a quoted extended bus name of the to bus.
CircuitId
Circuit Id of branch.
X From loc
The from bus X location, in inches, on the diagram.
Y From loc
The from bus Y location, in inches, on the diagram.
X KP1 loc
The first knee point X location, in inches, on the diagram.
Y KP1 loc
The first knee point Y location, in inches, on the diagram.
X KPn loc
The nth knee point X location, in inches, on the diagram.
Y KPn loc
The nth knee point Y location, in inches, on the diagram.
X To loc
The to bus X location, in inches, on the diagram.
Y To loc
The to bus Y location, in inches, on the diagram.
The format of a GEOPHYSICAL branch position record is as follows:

FromBusId
ToBusId
CircuitId
Circuit Id of branch.
X From loc
The from bus X location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
Y From loc
The from bus Y location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
X KP1 loc
The first knee point X location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
Y KP1 loc
The first knee point Y location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
X KPn loc
The nth knee point X location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
Y KPn loc
The nth knee point Y location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
X To loc
The to bus X location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
Y To loc
The to bus Y location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
If there are no kneepoints associated with the branch, there will be no X & Y KPn entries in the
record.
3-26
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
The format of a CARTESIAN two winding transformer position record is as follows:

FromBusId
ToBusId
CircuitId
Circuit Id of two winding transformer.
X From loc
The from bus X location, in inches, on the diagram.
Y From loc
The from bus Y location, in inches, on the diagram.
X Sym loc
The two winding transformer symbol X location, in inches, on the diagram.
Y Sym loc
The two winding transformer symbol Y location, in inches, on the diagram.
X KP1 loc
The first knee point X location, in inches, on the diagram.
Y KP1 loc
The first knee point Y location, in inches, on the diagram.
X KPn loc
The nth knee point X location, in inches, on the diagram.
Y KPn loc
The nth knee point Y location, in inches, on the diagram.
X To loc
The to bus X location, in inches, on the diagram.
Y To loc
The to bus Y location, in inches, on the diagram.
The format of a GEOPHYSICAL two winding transformer position record is as follows:

FromBusId
ToBusId
CircuitId
Circuit Id of two winding transformer.
X From loc
The from bus X location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
Y From loc
The from bus Y location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
X Sym loc
The two winding transformer symbol X location, in degrees latitude (see format,
above).
Y Sym loc
The two winding transformer symbol Y location, in degrees latitude (see format,
above).
X KP1 loc
The first knee point X location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
Y KP1 loc
The first knee point Y location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
X KPn loc
The nth knee point X location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
Y KPn loc
The nth knee point Y location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
X To loc
The to bus X location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
Y To loc
The to bus Y location, in degrees latitude (see format, above).
If there are no kneepoints associated with the two winding transformer, there will be no X & Y KPn
entries in the record.
3.6.9 Moving Diagram Elements

Existing diagram items can be moved with mouse actions. Buses can be moved and their length
changed. Equipment and lines can be repositioned on a bus or moved to another bus. If the Bind
Items option is selected, then moving equipment and lines to another bus in [Diagram] will also
move the equipment and lines within the network data.
3-27
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
To move or resize a bus, select the bus in the diagram with a mouse click, (see Figure 3-22a). If the
[Program Preferences] dialog has been specified to Resize buses on one end only, the doublearrow mouse pointer will indicate this.
To move the bus to a different location, select the desired bus and position the mouse over the
busbar. The mouse pointer will change to a four-arrow cursor. Drag the bus to the desired position
(Figure 3-22b).
To make the bus longer or shorter, select the desired bus and position the mouse over one end of
the bus. The pointer will change to a double sided arrow. Drag the bus end handle to the desired
length (Figure 3-22c).
(a) Select Bus to Move
(b) New Position
(c) Grab Bus End to Re-size
Figure 3-22. Moving and Resizing Buses

To move existing equipment and lines:
1. Click the diagram component you wish to move; a bus end connection is illuminated with a
circle (Figure 3-23a).
2. Drag the end to the new attachment point. Valid attachment points will be illuminated with
circles as the mouse passes over them (Figure 3-23b).
3. When the end illuminates the desired attachment point, release the mouse to connect the
diagram component (Figure 3-23c).
The capacitor symbol direction from the bus can be controlled. Drag the connection circle to
the desired edge of the busbar; the crosshairs in the circle will guide you.
3-28
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
(a) Selecting
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
(b) Dragging to New Position
(c) New position
Figure 3-23. Moving Equipment

Not only can equipment and lines be moved to another location on a bus but they can also be
moved to another bus, using the same technique. If Bind Items is selected, (see Section 3.6.4)
moving equipment and lines to another bus in [Diagram] will also move the equipment and lines in
[Network Tree]. The change will also be reflected in [Spreadsheet]. Consequently, this is another
form of modifying not only the power flow topology but also the location of equipment.
3.6.10 Changing Status

In addition to using the right-click Switch function (Section 3.6.5), to toggle equipment to and from
in-service status, the connection between [Diagram] and [Spreadsheet] may be useful. As shown
in the following example, double-clicking a component in the diagram opens the spreadsheet tab
and highlights the row containing that components data. In-service status may be enabled or
disabled, as desired.
3-29
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Selected element row is highlighted to locate status checkbox.
Double-click branch in diagram.
Figure 3-24. Changing Line Status from Diagram View
3.6.11 Displaying ISO Symbols

Diagram > Display ISO Symbols
This option modifies the images of network components, replacing PSSExpress symbols with
standard ISO symbols. Figure 3-25 shows the standard PSS Express transformer symbol,
compared with the ISO symbol.
PSSExpress Symbols
ISO Symbols
Figure 3-25. Examples of Transformer Symbols
3.6.12 Animating Flows
3-30
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
This function animates branch flows on the active [Diagram] using the flows from the last power
flow solution (Figure 3-26).
Figure 3-26. Animated Flow
3.6.13 Viewing Current Loadings
This function displays line loading graphs using values from the last solution (Figure 3-27).
3-31
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Figure 3-27. Current Loading Blocks Indicating Flow Levels
3.6.14 Multi-Section Line Reporting
This function displays or hides the dummy buses that constitute the terminals of multiple sections
that make up a single line between buses.
(a) Reporting OFF
(b) Reporting On
Figure 3-28. Multi-Line Section Reporting ON and OFF
3.6.15 Item Annotation

Right-clicking on a bus in [Diagram] opens the [Bus Annotation Properties] dialog (Figure 3-29).
The label displayed, as well as its positioning, can be specified. Furthermore, you can choose to
3-32
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
suppress all annotation at the selected bus or to apply the annotation properties specified for the
single bus to all buses by selecting the Apply the selection option to all buses checkbox.
Figure 3-29. Bus Annotation Properties Dialog
3-33
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Right-clicking on a load or a shunt capacitor/reactor opens the appropriate annotation properties

dialog (see Figure 3-30). You can choose the type of image or annotation, suppression of annotationy, and application of the properties to all shunt or load items.
Figure 3-30. Annotation Properties Options for Shunts and Loads
3-34
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Right-clicking on a branch or 2-winding transformer transformer (the transformer symbol itself, not
the transformer line) and selecting Item Annotation opens the [Branch Annotation Properties]
or [Two-Winding Transformer Annotation Properties] (Figure 3-31) dialogs, respectively. These
dialogs are similar, except that when selecting a nontransformer branch, only the Flow Annotation
Options are available, with the option to draw a series capacitor symbol or circuit ID.
3-35
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Figure 3-31. Branch / Two Winding Transformer Annotation Properties

Dialogs
3-36
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
A separate dialog is provided for three-winding transformers, [Three-Winding Transformer Annotation Properties] (Figure 3-32).
Figure 3-32. Three-Winding Transformer Annotation Properties Dialog

Dialogs are also available for annotating generators and multi-terminal dc lines (Figure 3-33) and
FACTS devices (Figure 3-34).
Figure 3-33. Other Annotation Properties Dialogs
3-37
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Figure 3-34. FACTS Device Annotation Properties Dialog
3.6.16 Contouring
Diagram > Contouring > Enable Contouring
The [Contour Settings] dialog provides the means to control contouring used to visualize voltage
violations and magnitude for bus, line or machine elements.
3-38
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Figure 3-35. Contour Settings Dialog
3-39
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
One of the following quantities must be specified along with the contour type:
Bus Element
Voltage Magnitude, pu
Angle rad
Load MVA
Zone
Voltage Magnitude, kV
Load P
Area
Scheduled Voltage
Angle deg
Load Q
Owner
Line Element
MW Flow
MVA Flow
Ampe
MVar Flow
% Rating
pu Current
QMax
QMin
Machine Element
QGen
The three contour parameters are selected from a sliding scale.

Resolution
Range 10 - 2000. To compute values across the entire contouring region, a virtual grid is
super-imposed on the contour points. The value at each grid point is interpolated using
actual values at the contour points. The weights are inversely proportional to the square of
the distance from each contour point. Values at the grid points are then mapped to a color
using the selected colormap before rendering is performed. A larger resolution results in a
finer grid and more accurate results but also increases processing time.
Figure 3-36. 6 X 6 Virtual Grid Superimposed on Contour Points P1 P6

Influence Area
Range 1 - 100. Each contour point impacts a circular region, centered at the point with
radius proportional to the influence setting. In the current implementation, the radius is
equal to the square of the influence. A larger influence results in more blending and can be
used for general overviews. Smaller settings are applied to highlight variations as each grid
point is affected by fewer contour points. By decreasing influence, each grid point will be
affected less by contour points farther away.
3-40
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Figure 3-37. Circle of Influence around Contour Point P1

Boundary Size
Range 0 - 3. The typical setting is 0 or 1.
The user must specify one of the following interpolation methods.
Linear Approximation
The Linear Approximation method iterates over all contour points. A given contour point
contributes to each grid point that lies within its circle of influence. Larger circles take longer
to process therefore processing time is sensitive to changes in influence rather than resolution. This algorithm is faster than the Linear method while providing accuracy and is the
current default. The order of the algorithm is O(m) where m is the number of contour points.
Contour Point 1 Adds Contributions to

G1, G2 and G3
Figure 3-38. Linear Approximation Method
3-41
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Linear
The Linear Method is the most accurate. Processing speed depends on the resolution of
the grid. Values at each grid point are interpolated using all contour points within a certain
distance. The contribution from each contour point is the value of the physical quantity
being plotted weighted (inversely) by the square of its distance from the grid point. Thus the
speed of the algorithm is O(n^2 * m) where n is the desired resolution and m is the number
of contour points. The time taken by the Linear Method is therefore very sensitive to the
resolution of the grid.
Grid Point 1 Receives Contributions from

Contour Points 1, 2, 3
Figure 3-39. Linear Method
Quad Tree
This method subdivides the diagram into uneven sized grid cells with finer subdivision
occurring in areas that exhibit greater variation. Processing efforts are focused on regions
that show signs of larger differences in the physical quantity being plotted. This occurs at
the expense of other areas that have more uniform values. The QuadTree method generally results in a more blended diagram. For small values of depth, contours are generated
very quickly.
3-42
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Figure 3-40. Non-Uniform Partitioning using the QuadTree Method

The Depth and Tolerance settings are required for the quad tree interpolation method.
Depth
The Depth setting determines the maximum level of subdivision that will occur. Further
partitioning of grid cells will not occur even if the current difference is greater than the
user selected tolerance value.
Tolerance Value
The Tolerance Value is needed to end subdivision. For a given grid cell, the difference
between the maximum and minimum at the corners is calculated. If it is less than the
specified tolerance, no further splitting occurs. Otherwise, the grid cell is recursively
subdivided further.
The Enable Shading option can be disabled to create a non-shaded image. This is useful when
viewing regions of finer subdivision resulting from the QuadTree partitioning.
The Color Map options determine which values are to be displayed and the colors assigned to them.
the Maximum and Minimum values are used as a filter. Any points that lie outside this range will be
removed. The discarded quantities dont contribute to interpolated values at the grid points. This
feature can be used to see variations within a desired range. The Gradient options translate interpolated values at grid points into colors. The maximum value is mapped to the topmost color and
the minimum is gets assigned to the bottom color. The user selects from the following color options:
Red (dark to light)
GrayScale (dark to light)
Green (dark to light)
Blue=low Red=high (default)
Blue (dark to light)
Red=low Blue=high
3-43
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
Helpful Hints
The Linear Approximation method is recommended unless extreme accuracy is

needed or only a generalized picture is desired.
When using the Linear Approximation, start with the default influence setting. Smaller
values highlight detailed variations better. Increase influence slowly and only as necessary.
Larger influence values result in more blending and tell a more generalized story.
When using the Linear method start with the default value for resolution, increase it
slowly if any square-like artifacts appear. Once the artifacts are gone, a further increase
in resolution can be tried if desired but after a certain point the law of diminishing
returns goes into effect.
Both Linear and Linear Approximation are sensitive to the number of contour points.
For diagrams with large extents, larger influence values are needed. If at first no contours appear, try increasing the influence while keeping the resolution constant. If the
contours appear but exhibit square-like grid cells, increase the resolution till you see a
better picture.
Use a Bounding Box of 0 or 1, especially for diagrams with large extents.
To get a generalized view of a large area, use larger values for influence.
As a general recommendation, start with defaults for influence and resolution. Increase
each parameter only as needed while keeping the other constant to see the difference
in the picture.
Use the QuadTree method to get quick generalized pictures.
Processing time is a combination of several factors in all cases. However the speed of
the Linear Approximation method is affected mostly by the influence setting while that
of the Linear method is determined by the resolution.
Busbars and Branches are represented by several contour points, placed equally along
the length. When plotting quantities for Busbars or Branches and using a minimum
influence (value of 1) an oval effect is seen around the element being plotted. This is
the union of all the circles centered at the contour points.
3.6.17 Customizing Tooltips

Diagram > Customize Tooltips > Show item ID only
Diagram > Customize Tooltips > Show item current results
Diagram > Customize Tooltips > Show item expanded parameters
Tooltips are the pop-up informational boxes that appear when the mouse cursor is held over a
component in the diagram. The Display Tooltips option in the [Diagram Properties] dialog must be
enabled for tooltips to function (see Section 3.2). If the option to display tooltips is enabled, one of
the three types of information can be displayed in the tooltip (see Figure 3-41). The example shows
possible tooltips for a bus.
3-44
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Revising a Diagram
(a) ID Only
(c) Expanded Parameters
(b) Current Results
Figure 3-41. Alternative Tooltip Presentations for a Bus
3-45
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Using Auto-Draw
3.7 Using Auto-Draw
One of the features of [Diagram] is the ability to automatically build or expand one-line diagrams
of power flow cases bus-by-bus or by groups of buses. This facilitates the rapid population of a
blank [Diagram] with a one-line diagram of the open power flow case.
Using the Auto Draw function will place a selected bus on the diagram graphically, and automatically draw adjacent equipment, including adjacent buses. The Auto Draw feature also allows the
specification of the number of bus levels to extend out of the first bus. Auto Draw will draw and
connect these buses and neighboring facilities of all of these buses.
The user has two options to draw a diagram quickly. The first approach involves the following steps:
1. Open a blank diagram (see Section 3.3).
2. Select the Auto Draw button and click in [Diagram] to set the bus position.
The [Select Bus for Auto-Draw] dialog (Figure 3-42) opens.
3. Select or specify the bus to grow and the number of levels to grow out from this bus.
For example, using the savnw.sav power flow case, bus 101 has been selected and grown
two levels (see Figure 3-42).
The bus, all its equipment, all lines, transformers, and attached buses are then laid out in
[Diagram]. In the example, Bus 101 bus and its one neighboring bus are drawn, along with their
attached equipment and connecting transformer branch.
If a Bus Location file has been opened and the Use Bus Location file to AutoDraw/Grow items
option on the [Program Preferences] dialog has been selected (see Section 3.6.8), the buses will
be placed at the locations specified in the Bus Location file. If the bus location data for the bus does
not exist or the option is disabled, then the bus will be placed at the default location.
The process could be continued by selecting locations on the diagram and bus numbers from the
[Select Bus for Auto-Draw] dialog. If, in this example, bus 152 were the next one selected and
one level was grown out of this bus, the diagram would grow to include the other attached buses to
bus 152, which are buses 153, 202, and 3004, their connected equipment, and the branches from
these buses back to bus 152.
3-46
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Using Auto-Draw
Figure 3-42. Drawing Bus 101 and Buses Two Levels Out, using the Auto
Draw Toolbar Button
The second approach to start drawing a diagram is to reverse the order of actions, as follows:
1. Select (highlight) the desired starting bus in [Network Tree].
2. Click the Auto Draw button from the Diagram Toolbar.
3. Click in [Diagram] to place the bus.
If the first bus selected in [Network Tree] was bus 101, the result would be bus 101 and 151 plus
all equipment attached to either bus. The process could be continued by selecting other buses from
[Network Tree].
If there is a bus or buses already drawn on the one-line diagram it is possible to use the Grow option
from [Network Tree] to add more one more level of buses. Also, the Grow N Levels option can be
used to add multiple levels of buses to the diagram. Right-click the bus in [Diagram] (see Figure 311).
Selecting Grow N Levels on either of these menus will initiate the drawing of all buses attached to
the bus selected, along with the connected equipment and the branches back to the selected bus
3-47
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Using Auto-Draw
N levels out from the bus. This method assists in rapidly creating a one-line diagram of the open
power flow case.
If a connecting bus or branch already exists on the diagram when a Grow is performed, any new
connections will be made to the existing equipment.
3.7.1 Bus Orientation

Diagram > Auto Draw style > Vertical buses
Diagram > Auto Draw style > Horizontal buses
When buses are added to [Diagram] using Auto Draw or by selecting the Grow option described in
Section 3.6, the buses will be drawn either horizontally or vertically. This function permits shifting
between vertical and horizontal bus representations as the one-line diagram is being developed
3-48
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Displaying Power Flow Results
3.8 Displaying Power Flow Results
Diagram > Results > Powerflow results
Superimposing power flow results on a one-line diagram is an effective means of presentation. This
section will highlight some of those features on the assumption that a slider diagram (*.sld) has
been created. The following examples use the savnw.sav and savnw.sld files provided in the
Example folder of the PSSExpress installation.
A portion of the network power flow results can be seen in Figure 3-43. Here the annotation is
selected to show:
Bus name and number with voltages shown in pu and kV
Branch flows at to and from ends
Transformer taps on both sides
MW and Mvar flows on branches and in equipment
Signs as opposed to arrows to show flow directions. Plus signs indicate flows out of a
bus and minus signs indicate flows into a bus.
Figure 3-43. Power Flow Results in Diagram View
3.8.1 Power Flow Annotation

Diagram > Annotation
3-49
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Results of a power flow analysis may be modified as a whole for presentation using a set of annotation dialogs. For example, the user can choose to show all the information in Figure 3-43 for all
buses, branches and equipment, including generation, or to globally prevent showing of particular
types of information (such as no branch flows on all branches) or to select particular buses, lines
and equipment to have their annotation suppressed.
The right-click menu applied to a selected diagram item opens a specific annotation dialog for
that item (see also Sections 3.6.5 and 3.6.15).
When power flow results are shown, the [Powerflow Data Annotation] dialog provides a Diagram
Annotations tab (Figure 3-44) to modify the presentation for printing or to save to a file.
Figure 3-44. Power Flow Data Annotation Dialog

Options include the type of results annotation information to be displayed for branches, buses and
equipment. The user can represent flows on the branches with either signs or arrows (see Figure 345). The real power, in each case is shown above the branch.
3-50
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
(a) Signs
(b) Arrows
Figure 3-45. Signs and Arrows to Display Flow
3.8.2 Range Checking

The [Powerflow Data Annotation] dialog also provides a Diagram Range Checking tab (Figure 346), which is a very useful tool. Not only can [Diagram] show numerical results for bus voltage, line
flow and equipment loading, but color-coding can be set up to provide rapid identification of problems. It is possible to highlight branches that are overloaded and bus voltages that are either higher
than a selected high limit or lower than a selected low limit.
In addition, the user can choose to over-ride the color selected for bound items and select colors
for each voltage level in the network. This makes it easy to identify networks at different voltage
levels.
Figure 3-46. Diagram Range Checking Tab

Use voltage level thresholds: When enabled, this option indicates equipment and lines based on
voltage level. Threshold levels may be specified by entering a value directly in the input field or
using the scroll buttons. Click the sample line corresponding to each threshold to open a [Voltage
3-51
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
level] dialog for each threshold (Figure 3-47) to change line styles and colors. Click the palette
button to open the [Color] dialog (Figure 3-3).
Figure 3-47. Voltage Level Dialog

Use line ratings: When enabled, this option indicates lines that are loaded above the specified
percent loading value. Click the sample line to open a [Line ratings appearance] dialog (Figure 348) to change line style and color. Click the palette button to open the [Color] dialog (Figure 3-3).
Figure 3-48. Line Ratings Appearance Dialog

Branch Rating Set: This option provides a pull-down list of branch ratings to which the % loading
value is to be applied. Rate A is typically used for normal power flow conditions while Rate B or C
would be used to examine contingency conditions where loadings are often allowed to be higher.
Use bus voltage limits: When enabled, this option indicates buses with voltages above or below
specified maximum and minimum voltage levels. Click the sample line to open the [Bus voltage
3-52
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
limit appearance] dialog (Figure 3-49) to change line style and color. Click the palette button to
open the [Color] dialog (Figure 3-3).
Figure 3-49. Bus Voltage Limit Appearance Dialog

Out-of-service equipment: This setting indicates status of out-of-service equipment. Click the
sample line to open the [Out-of-service equipment appearance] dialog (Figure 3-50) to change
line style and color. Click the palette button to open the [Color] dialog (Figure 3-3).
Figure 3-50. Out-of-Service Equipment Appearance Dialog

Loading percentages for loading bar charts: These fields are used to control the percentage at
which overload colors are applied to the loading bar charts. Overload colors by default progress
from purple to red to deeper shades of red. Click [ ] to open the [Color] dialog to modify these
colors.
3-53
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
The following example shows that that buses 206 and 3018 (and others) are highlighted for having
voltages in excess of the high limit, specified at 1.02 pu. Bus 203 and 205 are highlighted for having
voltages below the low limit, 0.97 pu.
The circuit one between buses 153 and 154 (and others) are highlighted to show their loading is in
excess of 90% of their Rate A.
Figure 3-51. Power Flow Diagram showing Effect of Range Checking
3.8.3 Adding a Summation Record
The user can clarify the power flow results visualization by including a summation block for flow
information. This could be useful to report current results when testing a variety of network conditions. The [Edit Summation] dialog provides fields for a title line for the summation and a variety
of system results to sum. For example, these can be generator output and line flows. The example
in Figure 3-52 sums the difference between generator output at bus 101 and the flow on circuit 1 of
the line from bus 151 to 201.
3-54
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
The summation block is placed in [Diagram] at the point selected by the user. Subsequently, it can
be edited and/or moved to a different location.
Figure 3-52. Edit Summation Dialog

To cancel the summation activity, press the [Esc] key. Refer to PSSE Program Operation Manual,
Summation Block Structure for additional information.
3.8.4 Adding a Report Node
The user can clarify the power flow results visualization by including a report node to display any
type of information that may be of importance. This could be useful to report current results when
testing a variety of network conditions.
The report node is Python based. Python code can be written to calculate and return any value,
using existing Python APIs, that may be of interest to the user.
3-55
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
The [Edit Report Node] dialog provides fields for a title line for the report node, passing arguments
to Python, defining the Python function, and defining the Python module that contains the Python
function. The example in Figure 3-53 shows the definition of a report node called Area Summary:,
using the Python function area_summary, in the Python module pssgrpg, passing 1 as an
argument.
The report node is placed in [Diagram] at the point selected by the user. Subsequently, it can be
edited and/or moved to a different location.
To cancel the report node activity, press the [Esc] key.
Figure 3-53. Example of Report Node
3-56
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Displaying Impedance Data
3.9 Displaying Impedance Data
Diagram > Results > Impedance Data
This function displays impedance and equipment rating data. By default the diagram displays the
generator scheduled power and the reactive power limits. Bus information includes the bus number,
name and base kV. Line and transformer information shows the R, X and B values, as appropriate,
and the transformer tap information is included.
Figure 3-54. Example of Impedance Data in a One-Line Diagram
3.9.1 Impedance Annotation

Diagram > Annotation opens the [Impedance Data Annotation] dialog (Figure 3-55).
3-57
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Displaying Impedance Data
Figure 3-55. Impedance Data Annotation Dialog

Bus, branch, and equipment annotations, as well as voltage level thresholds are available in the
impedance data annotation.
3-58
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Displaying Graphical Difference Data
3.10 Displaying Graphical Difference Data

Activity GDIF
Validly specified power flow case.
Both cases solved to an acceptable mismatch level.
Diagram > Results > Graphical Difference Data
The [Compare Cases on a Diagram] dialog (Figure 3-56) requires the specification of a saved
case against which to compare the working case. Click [ ] to open the selection window for the
required Saved Case file (*.sav). Click [OK] to perform the activity. A summary of the comparison is
routed to the Report tab.
Figure 3-56. Compare Cases on a Diagram Dialog

Differences in solution results and bus boundary conditions between the current power flow case
and the selected saved case are displayed. Differences are always calculated as comparison case
values minus power flow case values. At each bus in the bus comparison list, voltage differences
in per unit and phase angle differences in degrees are shown. All other difference values are shown
in MW and Mvar. An example diagram is shown in (Figure 3-57).
3-59
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Figure 3-57. Example of Case Comparison Differences

The difference fields are left blank for equipment items present in the power flow case, but not in
the comparison case. Those items present in the comparison case that are not included in the
power flow case are omitted from the diagram.
Load and shunt differences include voltage sensitivity effects.
Differences in flow into a converter bus of DC line n are shown if all of the following conditions apply:
DC line n is present in both cases.
The converter bus is in the bus compare list.
The same converter bus is specified in both cases.
Two-terminal dc lines are annotated according to the annotation properties currently set in the
diagram.
Differences in the sending end bus shunt element of FACTS device n are shown if all of the following
conditions apply:
FACTS device n is present in both cases.
The sending end bus is in the bus compare list.
The same sending end bus is specified in both cases.
If the above conditions are satisfied and FACTS device n has a series element in the power flow
case, differences in series flow at the sending end bus are also shown.
Differences in series flow at the terminal end bus are shown if all of the following conditions apply:
FACTS device n is present and has a series element in both cases.
The terminal end bus is in the bus compare list.
The same terminal end bus is specified in both cases.
3-60
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
3.10.1 Comparison Annotation

Diagram > Annotation opens the [Graphical Case Comparison Data Annotation] dialog
(Figure 3-58).
Figure 3-58. Graphical Case Comparison Data Annotation Dialog

Only bus annotation and voltage thresholds are available in the case comparison annotation.
3-61
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Creating a Bus Display
3.11 Creating a Bus Display

Activity GOUT/GEXM
Validly specified power flow case solved to an acceptable mismatch level.
Diagram > Generate a graphical power flow bus display
This function provides the means to create a one-line drawing starting with a single bus. Enter the
desired bus number in the [Select Bus] dialog (Figure 3-59) and click [OK]. A diagram of power
flow results is generated for the selected bus, showing associated lines and equipment and distant
to buses. All distant buses are represented as nodes (Figure 3-60).
Figure 3-59. Select Bus Dialog
Figure 3-60. Example of Single Bus Display, Power Flow Results
3-62
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
All [Diagram] functions are available using the single bus display. Thus, selecting Diagram > Results
> Impedance data and the Current loadings icon from the active diagram in Figure 3-60 produces
the example shown in Figure 3-61. Switching and data changing functions are available for any data
display.
Figure 3-61. Example of Single Bus Display, Impedance Data

The single bus display is also available from [Network Spreadsheet]. Select the desired Bus
Number on the Buses tab, right-click, and select Create bus display (GOUT/GEXM). The default
view (Power Flow Results) is displayed.
3.11.1 Single Bus Display Labels and Symbols

Default labels for the single bus display depend upon the type of bus specified.
If the selected bus is a generator bus controlling the voltage at a remote bus, the remote bus
number, name, and base voltage will be tabulated with the other selected bus information. Further,
if the active and reactive power mismatch at the bus exceed 0.5 MVA or kVA, according to the power
output option in effect, the mismatch information will be listed.
Each machine at a selected bus is separately displayed with the machine identifier printed inside of
the generator symbol. In the Power Flow Results view, the machine loading is shown along with one
of the H, L and R flags indicating the current reactive loading condition. In the Impedance Data view,
the machines defined power setting and reactive limits are shown.
Load and shunt elements are represented with actual loadings when shown in the Power Flow
Results view view and ratings when shown in the Impedance Data view. Load identifiers are shown
within the symbol.
3-63
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Branches are drawn from the top of the page in ascending to bus order (numeric or alphabetic
according to the bus output option in effect). The to bus number and name are drawn on the
extreme right of the branch line adjacent to the to bus busbar. Placing the cursor on the branch will
pop up the line from and to bus numbers/names and the circuit identifier. In the Power Flow Results
view flows are shown as active and reactive power leaving the from bus (the selected bus) and as
active and reactive power arriving at the to bus end. In the Impedance Data view, the R, X and B
data quantities are shown.
For two-winding transformer branches, two transformer symbols are drawn between the flow and
the to bus. Off-nominal turns ratio and any nonzero phase shift angle are displayed between the
flow and the first transformer symbol and between transformer symbols.
Any three-winding transformer connected to the bus is drawn similar to the two-winding transformer
except one more branch and bus are displayed, and off-nominal turns ratio and any nonzero phase
shift angle are shown only for the winding connected to the bus box.
When the multisection line reporting option is enabled (see Changing Program Settings), the far end
to bus (rather than the closest dummy bus) of each multisection line connected to the bus being
displayed is shown as its to bus.
An asterisk ( ) is drawn at the metered end of each branch. If a branch is a member of a multisection line grouping and the multisection line reporting option is enabled, the asterisk indicates the
metered end of the line section adjacent to the bus being displayed and a plus sign ( + ) designates
the metered end of the multisection line grouping.
Any dc lines connected to the bus are drawn before any AC branches in ascending DC line number
order, with two-terminal lines listed first, followed by any multi-terminal lines. Power flow conventions for dc lines are as in the Bus based report output format. Alpha, gamma, and the converter
transformer off-nominal turns ratios are displayed and tagged as in the Bus based reports. For multiterminal lines, no to bus end conditions are listed.
Any FACTS device with no series element which is connected to the selected bus is drawn to the
left of the bus. It is illustrated with a straight line drawn from the displayed bus and connects to a
rectangular box, which is attached to a shunt symbol. The rectangular box contains a power flow
direction arrow pointing in the direction of the shunt. The FACTS device number is displayed above
the device.
Any series FACTS device connected to the selected bus is drawn to the right of the bus with a line
connecting that bus and its associated terminal/send bus. The series element is illustrated by a
circle containing an embedded arrow and is located midway on the connecting line. The arrow indicates the power flow direction (sending end bus to terminal end bus direction). The FACTS device
number is displayed to the right of the connected bus.
For series FACTS devices with non-zero shunt current and/or bridge active power transfer limits,
when the selected bus is the sending end bus, two additional lines are drawn to represent the shunt
and bridge element connections. The first line is drawn to the right of the sending end bus underneath the series element connecting line and stops at a point midway between the sending end bus
and the terminal end bus. Another line is drawn from that point upward to the series element circle.
3.11.2 Navigating the Network Using the Single Bus Display

It is possible to proceed through the network graphically to examine power flow conditions and data
or to check topology.
3-64
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
To go from the initially selected bus to one of its to buses, double click the to bus node. The diagram
will then feature that bus and its connections. Figure 3-62 shows the result of double-clicking from
bus to bus.
Double-click
Bus 154
Figure 3-62. Scrolling through the Network
3.11.3 Converting Grow Mode

Convert Grow mode from GOUT to Auto-Draw
Single bus display diagrams are used for quickly traversing the network. A diagram originally
created with GOUT/GEXM will respond to growing elements differently from a diagram created
using Auto-Draw or Grow (see Section 3.7, Using Auto-Draw). During a Grow operation they simply
3-65
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
display everything connected to the bus. The Grow operations pays no attention to whether or not
the element exists in [Diagram]; the item is simply created again to lend clarity to the layout.
This function can be used to convert the grow behavior of a diagram from GOUT/GEXM to an AutoDraw style grow where each specific element only is created once.
This option is available only when a [Diagram] is the active view.
Additional Information
Section 11.33, Displaying Power Flow Solution on the Diagram

Section 11.34, Displaying Power Flow Data on the Diagram
3-66
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Generating a Graphical Report
3.12 Generating a Graphical Report

Activity GRPG
Validly specified power flow case solved to an acceptable mismatch level if network data is to be
included on the drawing.
Diagram > Generate a graphical report (GRPG)
This activity generates the old GRPG-style report. The [Graphical Report Data file] selection
window requires entering the filename of an existing Graphical Report Data file (*.grp). The
[Terminal Read] dialog (Figure 3-63) then requires a code for the output device. The most common
response is 26, directing the output to the screen. Future releases will provide support for GPRG
style reporting directly from [Diagram].
Figure 3-63. Terminal Read Dialog
3-67
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Generating a Graphical Report
Figure 3-64. GRPG-Style Graphical Report
PSS E Program Operation Manual,
Section 11.30, Generating a Graphical Report
3-68
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Diagram Management
3.13 Diagram Management

3.13.1 Diagram Contents
Diagram > Contents
The [Diagram Contents] screen presents an itemized list of the number of components in the
entire diagram, including diagram items, annotations, images, and text annotations added by the
user (Figure 3-65).
Figure 3-65. Diagram Contents
3.13.2 Errors/Missing Items

Diagram > Check
This function examines the entire network and diagram for apparent errors and missing items. The
results are displayed in the Progress tab (Figure 3-66).
To examine the network by subsystem, select Diagram > Check by Subsystem.
Figure 3-66. Results Generated by the Check Menu Option
3-69
Diagram > Manage Layers
A simple way to visualize layers is to imagine [Diagram] as an infinite number of sheets of clear mylar, stacked on top of another. Diagram items
are drawn on a single sheet of mylar, that is, they belong to a particular layer. When all sheets are laid down, [Diagram] is seen in its entirety.
This function opens the [Layers] dialog (Figure 3-67).
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure 3-67. Layers Dialog
Diagram View
Diagram Management
3-70
3.13.3 Diagram Layers
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Diagram Management
PSSExpress provides the capability to view selected layers. For example, layers could be defined
for base voltages of 110 kV, 200 kV, and 300 kV. The diagram items that correspond to these base
voltages could then be created on the appropriate layer. To view the entire network, all layers would
be made visible. To view only the 200 kV elements, the 100 kV and 300 kV layers would be made
invisible, leaving only the 200 kV layer visible.
At a minimum, [Diagram] contains two layers:
Layer 0: The background layer with any imported images.
Layer 1: The default layer.
You can change attributes in these layers, but they cannot be removed from [Diagram]. All new
diagram items added to [Diagram] are created on the active layer, which is the single layer
specified.
Even if all layers are visible, only one is considered the active layer. It is displayed in the
Status bar at the bottom of the PSSExpress interface when [Layers] is closed (Figure 3-68).
Figure 3-68. Status Bar Showing Active Layer

Click [Add] to specify a new layer. You may create a unique title by modifying the Layer description
field. Clicking another layer or [Close] saves the layer attributes, which may be modified. Highlight
a layer and click [Remove the last] to delete it.
The visibility of the layers depends on the options selected in [Layers].
Fixed: The layer is in the diagram file. It is visible if the Visible checkbox is selected.
Zoom-dependent: The current zooming factor determines layer visibility. If the current
zooming factor is within the minimum and maximum zooming factors specified, then the
layer is visible. If the zooming factor is outside the range, then the layer is invisible.
The Items are selectable checkbox enables the ability to highlight specific components of a layer.
To avoid the inadvertent manipulation of certain diagram components, place them on a separate
layer and deselect the checkbox.
To set the active layer, go to Diagram > Set Active Layer and select the desired layer from the pulldown list in the [Select Layer] dialog (Figure 3-69).
Figure 3-69. Setting the Active Layer
3-71
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Diagram Management
To assign network components to a layer, select the component and right-click to display the menu.
Select Display > Assign to Layer and select the desired layer from the pull-down list in [Select
Layer].
This method can be used to assign diagram items to a layer one at a time, or a group of items can
be selected and all be assigned to a layer. In the following example, all diagram items from Area 1
of the savnw.sav power flow case have been selected and assigned to a layer with the name Area 1
To see the entire one-line diagram, select all layers to be visible (see Figure 3-70). If the Area 1 layer
is selected to be not visible, the one-line diagram will show only the diagram items belonging to the
Default layer (see Figure 3-71).
Figure 3-70. All Layers Visible from Layers Dialog
3-72
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Diagram Management
Figure 3-71. Only Default Visible

Layer assignment may also be made from [Network Tree]. Right-clicking the network folder
opened to an expanded list will display a pop-up menu with an Assign all items to Layer option. This
function opens [Select Layer]. When the layer is selected, all drawn items in the expanded list are
re-assigned and [Diagram] is refreshed. This tool can be useful for assigning network items to
layers for an existing or imported diagram.
3.13.4 Property Overrides

Diagram > Select all items with property overrides
This function selects all items in the diagram that have had color, line style, or line width established
in Specifying Diagram Properties or Range Checking replaced by [Color] or [Line Style] dialogs
(Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-16).
Diagram > Remove property overrides from selected items
This function removes any property overrides from selected items in the diagram. The line style,
width and color will return to those specified by Specifying Diagram Properties or Range Checking.
3.13.5 Cleaning the Diagram

Diagram > Clean
This function performs a general diagram cleanup. As bugs are discovered in existing diagrams,
new cleaning modes are added to this function and released in program patches so that users will
be able to repair their diagrams. Repeatedly executing this activity will have no effect on a diagram,
it addresses only specific diagram issues. The current issues addressed are:
3-73
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Diagram Management
1. Makes sure any name extension is separated by a from the end of the internally generated
name.
2. Removes any unattached Branch or Radial symbols.
3. Checks for Summations that have lost their Identity strings.
4. Fixes any bad annotation tags found on branches and two winding transformers.
3-74
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Exporting Data
3.14 Exporting Data

3.14.1 Image File
File > Export > Diagram Image
You may export the visible area of an active diagram to either a Bitmap or a JPEG file. The [Export
Image As] dialog requires the name of the file in which to save the image and navigation to the
desired directory for file storage.
When the JPEG file type is selected, the export process requires the specification of the JPEG
quality level on a scale of 1 to 100 (see Figure 3-72). Some experimentation may be necessary to
find the desired level of quality, balanced with file size.
Figure 3-72. JPEG Quality Dialog
3.14.2 Bus Location File

File > Export > Bus Locations
You may export the x/y coordinates from all buses, branches, and two winding transformers in the
active diagram to a text file. Bus, branch and two winding transformer locations are recorded as
Cartesian coordinates. The [Select bus location output file] dialog requires the name of the file
(*.loc) in which to save the data and navigation to the desired directory for file storage.
3.14.3 Google Earth Locations File

File > Export > Google Earth Locations
You may export slider diagrams to KML (Keyhole Markup Language) format. Geographic Coordinate information in the WGS-84 (World Geodetic System) is required for graphical elements that
will be exported. The KML file can then be opened and manipulated in Google Earth. This feature
allows a power network to be viewed against the backdrop of location specific, geographic data.
The [Select Google Earth data output file] dialog requires the name of the file (*.kml) in which to
save the data and navigation to the desired directory for file storage.
3-75
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Diagram View
Closing the Diagram View
3.15 Closing the Diagram View

File > Close
The Close option provides the opportunity to save any changes made to the diagram since it was
last opened.
File > Save
The Save option over-writes a previous version of the file. If a new diagram is to be saved, the
[Save As] dialog requires a filename and the specification of file type: either Slider Binary file (*.sld),
the standard format, or Slider XML file (*.sldxml), an XML text file.
3-76
Chapter 4
Data Selection Tree View
Chapter 4 - Data Selection Tree View
4.1 Introduction
The [Tree] view provides a hierarchical, expandable and collapsible list view of the network, OPF,
dynamics, model, and plot data in the working case (see Figure 4-1). Folders can be expanded or
collapsed to control the amount of data visible. Only one folder may be expanded at a time.
A right-click in a blank area of [Tree] (without selecting a data category) will display a menu from
which hiding/exposing and docking/undocking the view can be selected.
Hide: Closes the view. The user must select View > Tree View to reopen it.
Allow Docking: Toggles between docking the view and making it a free-floating window.
4-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Network Tree
4.2 Network Tree

[Network Tree] provides a quick glance at all network data in the system. It is synchronized with
the bus subsystem selector to enable the user to reduce the amount of data presented at any one
time. [Network Tree] is also synchronized with [Network Spreadsheet] and [Diagram], reflecting
their current contents.
Figure 4-1. Network Tree View

When [Diagram] is active, the data items in [Network Tree] are updated to reflect whether a particular item is drawn in the diagram. If the item is not drawn, then the symbol to the left of the item is
blank. If the item is drawn, the symbol to the left of the item is filled with the symbol belonging to the
data category (i.e., busbar, load symbol, etc.).
When [Diagram] is active, data record property sheets can be opened by double-clicking a data
items in [Network Tree]. See Section 3.6.1, Using Data Records.
The symbols in [Network Tree] are refreshed whenever [Diagram] is made active. A network item
can be drawn in one diagram and not another, so the symbols provide a visual cue indicating
whether the network item is drawn in the active diagram (see Figure 4-2). When [Spreadsheet] is
active, all symbols are replaced with blanks.
4-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Network Tree
Buses in Working Case

but not in Active Diagram
Figure 4-2. Tree View, Buses in Active Diagram

Various menus are available by selecting and right-clicking a network component. Menus are
specific to the type of network element selected (see Figure 4-3).
4-3
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Network Tree
Bus Right-Click Menu
Machine Right-Click Menu
Area Right-Click Menu
Figure 4-3. Some Tree View Menu Options

Switch: Toggles in-service status; that is, disconnects the device.
Sort: All items in the selected data category are sorted in ascending alphanumeric order.
Network Data: Points to the selected network component in [Network Spreadsheet] on the relevant data tab, and highlights its data row.
Dynamics Data: Points to the selected network component in [Dynamics Spreadsheet] on the
relevant data tab, and highlights its data row.
Delete: Deletes the network component from the model.
Create bus subsystem: Filter the model by a set of selected buses.
Create area subsystem: Filter the model by a set of selected areas.
Create zone subsystem: Filter the model by a set of selected zones.
Create owner subsystem: Filter the model by a set of selected owners.
If [Diagram] is the active view, then the right-click menu for the selected element provides additional options. These are described in detail in Section 3.6.4, Binding Data, Section 3.6.5,
Displaying and Modifying Network Elements, Section 3.6.6, Drawing a Missing Bus, Section 3.7,
Using Auto-Draw, and Section 3.13.3, Diagram Layers.
Double-clicking a component activates [Network Spreadsheet], opens the correct data tab, and
highlights its data row.
4-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

OPF Tree
4.3 OPF Tree

The OPF tab in the Tree View (Figure 4-4) provides a quick glance at all OPF data in the working
case.
Figure 4-4. OPF Tree View

All network elements that have OPF data associated with them will have an entry in the appropriate
folder in the OPF tab.
Double-clicking a data element (i.e., a particular bus) activates [OPF Spreadsheet], opens the
correct data tab, and highlights the spreadsheet data row for the selected item.
[OPF Tree] displays only network elements for which OPF data has been defined, either through
opening an Optimal Power Flow data file or by initializing OPF data in the current working case (see
Section 19.2, Data Initialization for OPF).
4-5
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Dynamics Tree
4.4 Dynamics Tree

The Dynamics tab in the Tree View (Figure 4-5) provides a quick glance at all Dynamics data in the
working case. The Dynamics Tab is synchronized with the bus subsystem selector to enable the
user to reduce the amount of Dynamics data presented at any one time.
Figure 4-5. Dynamics Tree View

All network elements that have Dynamics models associated with them will have an entry in the
appropriate folder in the Dynamics tab.
Double-clicking a data element (i.e., a particular machine) activates [Dynamics Spreadsheet],
opens the correct data tab, and highlights the spreadsheet data row for the selected item.
[Dynamics Tree] only displays network elements for which Dynamics models have been defined,
either through opening a Snapshot or DYRE file or through [Dynamics Spreadsheet].
4-6
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Models Tree
4.5 Models Tree

The Models tab in the Tree View provides a quick glance at all Dynamics models present in the
current network (see Figure 4-6).
Figure 4-6. Models Tree View

The Models tab is organized by Dynamics model types e.g. Generators, Stabilizers etc. Each model
type contains a list of all models of that type present in the current network. The example in
Figure 4-6 shows that there are three types of exciter models present in the current network, SEXS,
SCRX and IEEET1.
Double-clicking a model activates [Models Spreadsheet] opened to the CONS tab of the selected
model.
4-7
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Plot Tree
4.6 Plot Tree

The Plot tab in the Tree View provides a quick glance at all channels defined in a channel output
file (see Figure 4-7). Folders can be expanded or collapsed to control the amount of data visible.
Figure 4-7. Plot Tree

Further details on using the integrated plot package can be found in Chapter 22, Dynamic Simulation PlotPackage.
4-8
Chapter 5
Tools
The Tools Menu allows the user to designate active toolbars, to select the icons (activity commands)
that are to be shown on each toolbar, to define Custom Toolbar buttons, to assign model search
paths, and to create the User Dynamics DLL. Toolbar icons are indexed in Appendix A.
Chapter 5 - Tools
5-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Tools
Customizing Toolbars
5.1 Customizing Toolbars

Tools > Customize Toolbars
The [Customize] dialog Toolbars tab (Figure 5-1) allows arrangement of the toolbars to suit your
modeling requirements. Toolbars can be turned on or off, and icons can be added or removed from
them. Custom toolbars can also be created.
Figure 5-1. Customize Dialog, Toolbars Tab

Use the checkboxes to enable/disable displays of the default toolbar arrangements. You may
choose whether or not to show tooltip messages identifying each buttons function when the mouse
pointer is held over it.
Toolbars can be rearranged in any position on the interface. They can also be dragged off the
toolbar location and converted into floating windows.
Many of the toolbar buttons (or toolbar commands) are duplicates of menu options and will
open the same dialog.
The Commands tab (Figure 5-2) displays the individual toolbar categories and shows the buttons
currently assigned to each toolbar. Click an icon to provide a description of its command function.
The example displays Show or hide the output bar.
To remove a button from an active toolbar, drag the icon from the toolbar to the Buttons area on the
Commands tab. To add a button to an active toolbar, by drag the icon from the the Buttons area on
the Commands tab to the desired location on the toolbar.
5-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Tools
Customizing Toolbars
Figure 5-2. Customize Dialog: Commands Tab
5-3
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Tools
Configuring Custom Toolbar Buttons
5.2 Configuring Custom Toolbar Buttons

Tools > Configure Custom Toolbar Buttons
The [Customize Toolbar Buttons] dialog lists available custom toolbar buttons and active toolbar
buttons (see Figure 5-3). These can be defined to execute user-specified commands.
Figure 5-3. Customize Toolbar Buttons Dialog

Thirty custom toolbar buttons are available. Each button requires a file type and a file name.
To define a toolbar button, highlight a button and assign a File Type, one of the following Automation
file types to be run when the button is clicked:
PYTHON - A Python script file (*.py) (default)
RESPONSE - A Response file (*.idv)
IPLAN - An IPLAN program (*.irf)
Click [ ] to open the [Open] selection window to specify the filename of the Automation file to be
executed when clicking the corresponding custom toolbar button. Make sure the Full Pathname of
File appears in the field.
You may specify a description (tooltip) of the operation to be performed when the corresponding
custom toolbar button is clicked in the optional Text To Display field. This description pops up when
the mouse cursor is held over the custom toolbar button. If a tooltip is not specified, the filename
associated with the button is displayed as a tooltip.
Click [Update] to apply the changes that youve made.
The arrows in the center of the dialog move buttons from being available to being active. Figure
Figure 5-4 shows the results of several defined buttons, two of which are in the active list.
5-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Tools
Configuring Custom Toolbar Buttons
Figure 5-4. Defined Toolbar Buttons

The button must be in the Active Buttons list to be available on the toolbar. The others will be grayed
out (Figure 5-5).
Figure 5-5. Custom Toolbar Showing Defined Buttons

These custom toolbar button definitions are preserved in a file named Toolbar.prm found in the
Windows Document and Settings directory for the active user.
5-5
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Tools
Creating Custom Toolbars
5.3 Creating Custom Toolbars

A custom designed toolbar can be created by selecting the [New] button in the Toolbars tab of the
[Customize] dialog (see Figure 5-1). A new New Toolbar dialog window (Figure 5-6) will be
displayed into which a name for the new toolbar may be entered. Click [OK] to display the new
toolbar in the list of toolbars and in the PSSExpress interface as a small, free-floating toolbar.
Figure 5-6. New Toolbar Dialog

To add command buttons to the new toolbar, click the Commands tab and drag the desired toolbar
buttons to the new toolbar window. The new toolbar window can be docked to the toolbar area by
dragging the window to the desired location on the toolbar and releasing the mouse.
To remove a user-defined toolbar from the list of toolbars on the Toolbars tab, highlight the desired
toolbar to be deleted and click [Delete]. The standard toolbars can be reset only to their default
settings.
5-6
PART 2: PSSEXPRESS ACTIVITIES
Chapter 6
Power Flow Data Entry
Chapter 6 - Power Flow Data Entry
6-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Retrieving a Power Flow Saved Case File
6.1 Retrieving a Power Flow Saved Case File

Activity CASE
Section 10.1, Creating a Saved Case File
File > Open
The case retrieval activity CASE restores the contents of a previously saved power flow Saved
Case File into the working case. The contents of the working case are overwritten while the contents
of the specified Saved Case File are unchanged.
The file selection window in the [Open] dialog lists only those files available when the Files of type:
field has been scrolled to the desired file type.
For this activity, scroll to Save Case file (*.sav). Highlight the desired file and click [Open]. After the
data is read into the working case, [Spreadsheet] is updated to include the new working case data.
Section 5.1, Retrieving a Power Flow Saved Case File

PSSE Application Program Interface (API), Section 1.49, CASE
Section 6.2, Listing Saved Case Filenames
6-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Listing Saved Case Filenames
6.2 Listing Saved Case Filenames

Activity SHOW
none
File > File information (SIZE/SHOW/BUSN)
Selecting the Powerflow Save cases option from [File Information] produces a report of power
flow case filenames in the current working directory.
Figure 6-1. Example of Power Flow Saved Case File Report
6-3

Reading Power Flow Raw Data into the Working Case
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
6.3 Reading Power Flow Raw Data into the Working Case
The bulk power flow data input activity READ picks up hand-typed power flow source data and
enters it into the power flow working case, rearranging it from its original format into a computationally oriented data structure in the process. The source data records are input from a Power Flow
Raw Data file.
After the data is read into the working case, [Spreadsheet] is updated to include the new working
case data.
6.3.1 Standard Data Input

Activity READ
If reading change data, the working case must contain a validly specified power flow case.
A Power Flow Raw Data File is available.
File > Open
For a standard READ of a Power Flow Raw Data File in the format of the PSSExpress release
indicated in the file, scroll to Power Flow Raw Data file (*.raw), highlight the desired file, and then
click [Open]. In the specified Power Flow Raw Data file, fields designating ac buses on load, generator, fixed shunt, branch, transformer, area, two-terminal dc line, VSC dc line, multi-terminal dc line,
multi-section line, FACTS device, and switched shunt data records must be specified as bus
numbers.
A standard READ may also be initiated by using the Power Flow Raw Data file, Options (*.raw) entry
in the Files of type: list. Highlight the desired file and then click [Open]. In the resulting [Read Power
Flow Raw Data] dialog, select Standard (READ) as the Power flow data input application. In the
RAW file version fields, the current or a prior PSSExpress release corresponding to the format of
the Power Flow Raw Data File must be indicated. When the revision number is specified in the file,
specify the current version; if some other version is specified, it will take precedence over that specified as REV on the first record of the Power Flow Raw Data File. The For input, use bus names
check box must be checked if the selected Power Flow Raw Data File contains any bus data fields
specified as extended bus names. Then click [OK].
Section 5.2, Reading Power Flow Raw Data into the Working Case
PSSE Application Program Interface (API)
Section 1.250, READ

Section 1.251, READRAWVERSION
See also:
Section 10.4, Creating a Power Flow Raw Data File
6-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

6.3.2 Subsystem Data Input

Activity READ
If adding data, the working case must contain a validly specified power flow case..
File > Open
For a subsystem READ of a Power Flow Raw Data File, scroll to Power Flow Data file, Options
(*.raw), highlight the desired file, and click [Open].
In the resulting [Read Power Flow Raw Data] dialog (Figure 6-2), select Stubsystem (READ,OPT)
as the Power flow data input application. In the RAW file version fields, the current or a prior
PSSExpress release corresponding to the format of the Power Flow Raw Data File must be indicated. When the revision number is specified in the file, specify the current version; if some other
version is specified, it will take precedence over that specified as REV on the first record of the
Power Flow Raw Data File. The For input, use bus names check box must be checked if the
selected Power Flow Raw Data File contains any bus data fields specified as extended bus names.
The Input by Subsystem fields allow the selection of the options described in Section 5.2.4,
Subsystem READ of the PSSE Program Operation Manual. Data input may be limited to any of
the following options:
Add only data within subsystem
Add only tie lines from subsystem
Add subsystem data + tie lines
The various subsystem selection checkboxes enable the specification of the subsystem by base
voltage, area, owner, and/or zone. Clicking [Select] for an active option opens the [Area
Subsystem Selector], [Owner Subsystem Selector], or [Zone Subsystem Selector] dialog, as
appropriate.
With all options selected, click [OK] to begin reading the data into the working case.
Section 5.2, Reading Power Flow Raw Data into the Working Case
Section 1.252, READSUB

Section 1.253, READSUBRAWVERSION
See also:
6-5

PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure 6-2. Read Power Flow Raw Data Dialog, Subsystem
6-6
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Reading / Changing Power Flow Data
6.4 Reading / Changing Power Flow Data

Activity RDCH
The working case must contain a validly specified power flow case.
File > Open
The bulk power flow data input and modification activity RDCH picks up manually-entered power
flow source data and enters it into the power flow working case. The source data records are in the
form of a Power Flow Raw Data File except that the Case Identification Data records are omitted;
that is, the first data record is expected to be a bus data record.
For activity RDCH, scroll to Power Flow Data file, Options (*.raw), highlight the desired file, and click
[Open].
In the resulting [Read Power Flow Raw Data] dialog (Figure 6-3), select Change (RDCH) as the
Power flow data input application. In the RAW file version fields, the current or a prior PSSExpress
release corresponding to the format of the Power Flow Raw Data File must be indicated. The For
input, use bus names check box must be checked if the selected Power Flow Raw Data File
contains any bus data fields specified as extended bus names. Then click [OK].
case data.
Section 5.7, Reading / Changing Power Flow Data

Section 1.246, RAWD_2

Section 1.248, RDCHRAWVERSION
See also:
6-7
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Reading / Changing Power Flow Data
Figure 6-3. Read Power Flow Raw Data Dialog, RDCH
6-8
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Selecting Extended Bus Name Input Format
6.5 Selecting Extended Bus Name Input Format

Misc > Select extended bus name input format
The extended bus name format was changed at PSSExpress Version 30 to accommodate longer
bus names. This activity allows the user to select the input format for older versions of
PSSExpress. All application functions that process buses based on the extended bus name will
use the selected format for processing. This setting is not preserved between runs of the
application.
Figure 6-4. Select Extended Bus Name Input Format Dialog
6-9
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Adding Machine Impedance Data
6.6 Adding Machine Impedance Data

Activity MCRE
Machine Impedance Data file (*.rwm)
File > Open
The machine impedance data input activity MCRE enters source data records from a Machine
Impedance Data File into the power flow working case.
For activity MCRE, scroll to Machine Impedance Data file (*.rwm). Highlight the desired file and click
[Open].
In the resulting [Machine Impedance Data] dialog, select the options for the setting of the status
of each new machine and for the treatment of existing machines with no input record. Then click
[OK].
case data.
Section 5.4, Adding Machine Impedance Data

PSSE Application Program Interface (API), Section 1.144, MCRE
See also:
Section 10.3, Saving Machine Impedance Data
6-10
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Managing Case Titles
6.7 Managing Case Titles

6.7.1 Importing a Long Title
Activity RETI
The working case must contain a non-null case.
File > Import > Long Title (RETI)
The long title data input activity RETI reads a data file containing up to 16 lines of alphanumeric data
and places them into the long title. The previous content of the long title is overwritten.
Activity RETI opens a file selection dialog with the title [Select file containing long case title]. The
file selector contains all entries in your working directory (see Establishing the Working Directory).
Select the desired file and click [Open] to import the long title into the working case.
Section 5.3, Reading Power Flow Data Additions from the Terminal
PSSE Application Program Interface (API), Section 1.263, RETI
6-11
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

6.7.2 Changing the Case Title and the Long Title

Activity CHTI
File > Case titles, short & long (CHTI)
The [Case Titles] dialog provides fields where the two-line case title and the 16-line long title may
be edited using standard windows techniques.
Figure 6-5. Case Titles Dialog
Section 5.34.2, Changing the Long Title

Section 2.9, CASE_TITLE_DATA

Section 2.22, LONG_TITLE_DATA
6-12
Chapter 7
Power Flow Data
Modification
PSSExpress allows the user to modify the original network model in a variety of ways. Network
elements can be added and removed either on an individual basis or in bulk. Network buses can be
renumbered. Transmission resistance elements can be updated. Separate power flow files can be
merged. Generation dispatch can be based on economic data. Existing network topology can be
modified.
Chapter 7 - Power Flow Data Modification
7.1 Changing Service Status and Power Flow Parametric Data

PSSExpress permits the user to change all service status, control mode, and other parametric
data associated with equipment represented in the working case. In the GUI, the primary means of
changing individual data items is the [Spreadsheet] (refer to Spreadsheet View).
7.1.1 Inter-area Transfer Data Changes

On the Inter-area Transfer tab, the Apply check box provides the ability to apply changes in the
transfer MW to the desired interchanges of the from and to areas (refer to PSSE Program Operation Manual, Section 5.9.3, Interarea Transfer Data Changes).
If this box is checked for the row of an inter-area transfer, a change to the Transaction MW of that
inter-area transfer results in a corresponding change to the desired area net interchange values of
the from and to areas.
If this box is unchecked, desired area net interchange values are not updated to reflect any interarea transfer change.
7-1
Power Flow Data Modification

Changing Service Status and Power Flow Parametric Data
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure 7-1. Inter-area Transfer Spreadsheet, Transfer MW
Section 5.9, Changing Service Status and Power Flow Parametric Data
7-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Electrically Disconnecting/Reconnecting a Bus
7.2 Electrically Disconnecting/Reconnecting a Bus

Activity DSCN/RECN
Power Flow > Changing > Disconnect / Reconnect bus (DSCN/RECN)
The bus disconnection activity DSCN automates the data changes required to electrically isolate a
bus. The bus reconnection activity RECN automates the data changes required to electrically
reconnect a bus.
The [Disconnect / Reconnect Bus] dialog (Figure 7-2) requires specification of the desired action
and the bus to be connected. The bus number or extended bus name, as established by the bus
input program option setting (refer to Saved Case Specific Option Settings of the PSSE Program
Operation Manual), may be entered in the input field. Alternatively, [Select...] may be used to open
the [Bus Selection] dialog (Figure 7-3) where the desired bus may be specified by double-clicking
on an entry in the selection list; click [Filter] to open a [Bus Filter] dialog (Figure 7-4) to apply
filtering criteria to limit the number of buses in the selection list.
Figure 7-2. Disconnect/Reconnect Bus Dialog
7-3
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 7-3. Bus Selection Dialog

Click [Filter] to open the [Bus Filter] dialog (Figure 7-4).
Figure 7-4. Bus Filter Dialog

Select one or more of the filtering criteria from among:
bus name mask
bus number range
base voltage range
bus type code
Click [OK] to go back to [Bus Selection] with the selected filtering options enforced.
Click [Go] on [Disconnect / Reconnect Bus] to implement the selected action.
7-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 7-5. Example of Disconnect Bus Output
Figure 7-6. Example of Reconnect Bus Output
Section 5.11, Electrically Disconnecting a Bus

Section 5.12, Electrically Reconnecting a Bus
Section 1.69, DSCN

Section 1.254, RECN
7-5
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Joining Buses
7.3 Joining Buses

Activity JOIN
Power Flow > Changing > Join buses (JOIN)
The bus joining activity JOIN enables the user to combine pairs of buses, retaining the identity of
one of the two buses.
The [Join Buses] dialog (Figure 7-7) requires identification of the two buses to be joined and the
specification of the line shunt treatment option. Either bus numbers or extended bus names, as
established by the bus input program option setting (refer to Saved Case Specific Option Settings
of the PSSE Program Operation Manual), are required and may be entered directly in the input
fields. Alternatively, [Select...] adjacent to each input field may be used to open the [Bus Selection] dialog (Figure 7-3) where the desired bus may be specified by double-clicking on an entry in
the selection list; click [Filter] to open a [Bus Filter] dialog (Figure 7-4) to apply filtering criteria to
limit the number of buses in the selection list.
Click [Go] to complete the joining process.
Figure 7-7. Join Buses Dialog
7.3.1 JOIN Example

As an example, using the savnw.sav power flow case, the buses 154 DOWNTN and 3008
CATDOG will be joined. In Figure 7-9 it can be seen that bus 154 has two loads (600+j450 MVA
and 400+j350 MVA) and bus 3008 has one load (200 + j75 MVA) at nominal voltage. The buses are
joined by one 230 kV line without line shunts.
7-6
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Joining Buses
If bus 154 is the retained bus, the following topological changes are implemented as a result of
joining buses 154 and 3008:
The load at bus 3008 is moved to bus 154 and its identifier is changed from 1 to 3.
The branch connecting buses 154 and 3008 is removed.
The transformer from bus 3008 to bus 3018 is rerouted so that it now connects buses
154 and 3018.
The non-transformer branch from bus 3008 to bus 3005 is rerouted so that it now connects buses 154 and 3005.
The mullti-section line from bus 3008 to bus 3005 is rerouted so that it now connects
buses 154 and 3005, and its multi-section line member from bus 3008 to 3007 is
rerouted so that it now connects buses 154 and 3007.
The summary output shown in Figure 7-8 reports the load identifier change. Figure 7-10 shows the
[Diagram] view of the retained bus 154 after bus 3008 is joined with it. The topological changes are
shown on the diagram.
Figure 7-8. Example of Join Buses Output
7-7
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Joining Buses
Figure 7-9. Original Topology
7-8
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Joining Buses
Figure 7-10. Revised Topology After Joining Buses 154 and 3008
Section 5.16, Joining Buses

PSSE Application Program Interface (API), Section 1.105, JOIN
7-9
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Splitting Buses
7.4 Splitting Buses

Activity SPLT
Power Flow > Changing > Split buses (SPLT)
The bus sectionalizing activity SPLT enables the user to split a bus into two buses connected by a
branch.
The [Split Buses] dialog (Figure 7-11) requires identification of the bus to be split and the number
of the new bus. The bus name and base voltage to be assigned to the new bus may also be specified. If omitted, the base voltage of the bus being split and a blank name are assigned to the new
bus.
Figure 7-11. Split Buses Dialog

The bus number or extended bus name, as established by the bus input program option setting
(refer to Saved Case Specific Option Settings of the PSSE Program Operation Manual), may be
entered in the input field. Alternatively, [Select...] may be used to open the [Bus Selection] dialog
(Figure 7-3) where the desired bus may be specified by double-clicking on an entry in the selection
list; click [Filter] to open a [Bus Filter] dialog (Figure 7-4) to apply filtering criteria to limit the
number of buses in the selection list.
Click [Go] to initiate the splitting process. The new bus is created along with a new jumper branch
connecting the original and new buses. The [Reassign Branches and Equipment] dialog then
opens and any displayed equipment items connected to the bus being split may be specified to be
moved to the new bus. Figure 7-12 shows the display if bus 154 were selected to be split in the
savnw.sav power flow case.
7-10
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Splitting Buses
Figure 7-12. Reassign Branches and Equipment Dialog
7-11
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Splitting Buses
Using the savnw.sav power flow case, (see Figure 7-13) bus 3003 can be split and circuit 2 from
bus 3005 reassigned to the new bus 3020.
Figure 7-13. Bus 3003 to be Split
Figure 7-14. Bus Selection and Reassignment for Bus Split
7-12
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Splitting Buses
Selection of the bus to be split, and the specification of the number, name and base voltage to be
assigned to the new bus, is done in [Split Buses] (see Figure 7-14). After clicking [Go], [Reassign
Branches and Equipment] displays the elements that can be selected to be moved to the new bus
3020. In the example, the option to move circuit 2 from bus 3005 to the new bus has been selected.
Clicking [OK] completes the process and generates a summary of the action in the Progress tab
(Figure 7-15).
Figure 7-15. Example of Split Buses Output

The result of the splitting process can be seen in [Diagram] (see Figure 7-16). The diagram shows
the new bus, 3020, the new branch from the new bus to the original bus and the new routing of
circuit 2 from bus 3005 to the new bus.
Figure 7-16. Diagram View of New Topology following Bus Split

A one-line Slider file conforming to the original topology will now show circuit 2 out-of-service. A
modified Slider file would have to be generated to display the new topology.
7-13
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Splitting Buses
PSS E Program Operation Manual, Section 5.17, Splitting Buses

Section 1.299, SPLT

Section 1.146, MOVE3WND
Section 1.147, MOVEBRN
Section 1.148, MOVELOAD
Section 1.149, MOVELOADS
Section 1.150, MOVEMAC
Section 1.151, MOVEPLNT
Section 1.152, MOVESHUNT
Section 1.153, MOVESHUNTS
Section 1.154, MOVESWS
7-14
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Tapping a Line
7.5 Tapping a Line

Activity LTAP
Power Flow > Changing > Tap line (LTAP)
The line tapping activity LTAP enables the user to introduce a new bus into the working case at a
designated location along a specified ac branch. Any non-transformer branch may be tapped with
activity LTAP.
The [Tap Line] dialog (Figure 7-17) requires the user to specify the line to be tapped, the location
of the new bus, and the identifying number, name, and base voltage of the new bus.
Figure 7-17. Tap Line Dialog

As an example, the branch from bus 3003 to 3005 circuit 1 in the savnw.sav power flow case will
be tapped at a point 40% of the distance from bus 3003. A new bus will be created with the number
3020, a name NEWBUS and a base voltage of 230 kV. Figure 7-18 shows the original topology as
[Diagram].
7-15
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Tapping a Line
Figure 7-18. Line Selected to be Tapped

Click [Select] in [Tap Line] to open the [Branch Selection] dialog (see Figure 7-19). Specifying a
bus in the From bus list will create a list of the to buses and circiut identifiers of the non-transformer
branches connected to that bus. Then specify an entry in the To bus list. If required, the [Filter] can
be used to reduce the listed buses to those in a specified subsystem.
In the example (Figure 7-19), the branch from bus 3003 to bus 3005, circuit 1, has been selected.
Clicking [OK] will return to [Tap Line].
7-16
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Tapping a Line
Figure 7-19. Specification of a Branch for the Tap Line
7-17
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Tapping a Line
Figure 7-20. Final Stage in Tap Line Activity

In [Tap Line], the tap position, 40% of the distance from bus 3003 and the new bus name, number
and base voltage are specified as shown in Figure 7-20. Clicking [OK] completes the process and
generates a summary of the action at the Progress device.
At this point, any Slider diagram established for the original network topology will indicate that the
tapped line is out-of-service. The one-line Slider diagram will need to be modified to show the new
topology with the new bus. Figure 7-21 shows a modified [Diagram] of the new topology around
the new bus.
7-18
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Tapping a Line
Figure 7-21. New Topology on Tapped Line
PSSE Program Operation Manual, Section 5.18, Tapping a Line
PSSE Application Program Interface (API), Section 1.115, LTAP
7-19
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Changing Equipment Identifiers
7.6 Changing Equipment Identifiers

Activity MBID
PSS Express permits the user to change the alphanumeric identifiers assigned to specified
machines, loads, fixed bus shunts, ac branches, multi-section line groupings, dc lines, FACTS
devices, and interarea transfers in the working case. In the GUI, the primary means of changing
individual data items is the [Spreadsheet] (refer to Spreadsheet View).
Figure 7-22. Inter-area Transfer Spreadsheet, Identifier
PSS E Program Operation Manual, Section 5.19, Changing Equipment Identifiers

Section 1.129, MBID2DC

Section 1.130, MBID3WND
Section 1.131, MBIDATRN
Section 1.132, MBIDBRN
Section 1.133, MBIDFACTS
Section 1.138, MBIDLOAD
Section 1.139, MBIDMAC
Section 1.140, MBIDMDC
Section 1.141, MBIDMSL
Section 1.142, MBIDSHUNT
Section 1.143, MBIDVSC
7-20
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Moving Equipment
7.7 Moving Equipment

Activity MOVE
Power Flow > Changing > Move network elements (MOVE)
The equipment transfer activity MOVE allows the user to move specified fixed shunts, switched
shunts, loads, machines, and plants from one bus to another. It also provides for connecting the far
end of specified branches and one winding of a three-winding transformer to different to buses.
The [Move Network Elements] dialog (Figure 7-23) provides tabs for each of the types of equipment that may be moved by activity MOVE.
Figure 7-23. Move Network Elements Dialog

Select the equipment category tab, and then specify the individual equipment to be moved and the
bus to which the equipment item is to be transferred. Clicking [Apply] completes the transfer.
Using the savnw.sav power flow case, the 500 kV line from bus 151, which terminates at bus 201
will be moved to terminate at bus 202. The original topology is shown in Figure 7-24.
7-21
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Moving Equipment
Figure 7-24. Original Topology before Moving Branch 151 - 201

From the Branch tab on [Move Network Elements] click [Select...] to open the [Branch Selection] dialog (Figure 7-27) and highlight the desired branch. [Filter] may be used to limit the number
of entries in the From bus list. Clicking [OK] returns to [Move Network Elements] where the new
to bus can be specified.
7-22
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Moving Equipment
Figure 7-25. Branch Selection Dialog

From the Destination (to bus) area of the Branch tab on [Move Network Elements], the bus
number or extended bus name, as established by the bus input program option setting (refer to
Saved Case Specific Option Settings of the PSSE Program Operation Manual), may be entered
in the bus input field. Alternatively, [Select...] may be used to open the [Bus Selection] dialog
(Figure 7-3) where the desired bus may be specified by double-clicking on an entry in the selection
list; click [Filter] to open a [Bus Filter] dialog (Figure 7-4) to apply filtering criteria to limit the
number of buses in the selection list. Clicking [OK] in [Bus Selection] returns to [Move Network
Elements] where all fields are now populated (Figure 7-27).
7-23
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Moving Equipment
Figure 7-26. Bus Selection Dialog
Figure 7-27. Example of Moving a Branch

Click [Apply] to complete the move. To end activity MOVE, click [Close].
When the moving process is complete, the original one-line Slider file will not be able to display the
new topology. The branch that was moved (in the case of this example, the line from bus 151 to bus
201) will be indicated as out-of-service. The Slider file will need to be modified to display the new
line termination. Figure 7-28 shows the new display with the new line location and the indicated line
out-of-service from the original topology. The non-existent branch can be deleted from the Slider
file. It will no longer be in the network data and will not appear in [Spreadsheet] or [Network Tree].
7-24
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Moving Equipment
Figure 7-28. New Topology Following Branch Move
PSS E Program Operation Manual, Section 5.20, Moving Equipment

Section 1.146, MOVE3WND

Section 1.147, MOVEBRN
Section 1.148, MOVELOAD
Section 1.149, MOVELOADS
Section 1.150, MOVEMAC
Section 1.151, MOVEPLNT
Section 1.152, MOVESHUNT
Section 1.153, MOVESHUNTS
Section 1.154, MOVESWS
See also:
Section 3.6.9, Moving Diagram Elements
7-25
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Removing Buses and Connected Equipment
7.8 Removing Buses and Connected Equipment

Activity PURG/EXTR
Power Flow > Changing > Delete network elements (PURG/EXTR)
PSSExpress facilitates the users ability to delete equipment items from the working case. In the
GUI, the primary means of deleting individual equipment items is the [Spreadsheet] (refer to
Chapter 2 Spreadsheet View). In addition, the following may be removed from a specified
subsystem:
subsystem buses and all equipment connected to them.
all outaged items of a selected equipment category in a subsystem.
The [Delete Buses and Outaged Network Elements] dialog (Figure 7-29) enables the user to
designate for processing either the entire working case or a specified bus subsystem (refer to
Section 4.8, Subsystem Selection of the PSSE Program Operation Manual). A bus subsystem
may be specified either via a [Bus Subsystem Selector] dialog by clicking [Select...], or by
entering buses directly in the [Delete Buses and Outaged Network Elements] dialog
Figure 7-29. Deleting Network Elements Dialog
7-26
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

7.8.1 Removing Buses

The bus removal activity EXTR removes subsystem buses and all equipment connected to them
from the working case.
It is possible to see buses and their associated lines and equipment that have been deleted in
[Diagram]. The unbound items (items that exist in the diagram but not in the network data because
of the deletion) are shown in color specified in [Diagram Properties]. Figure 7-30 shows a partial
view of the buses deleted from the FLAPCO area of the savnw.sav power flow case.
Figure 7-30. Example of Deleted Buses and the Diagram Properties Options
7.8.2 Removing Outaged Equipment

In the GUI, the equipment removal activity PURG deletes all outaged items of a specified equipment
category that are contained within a specified subsystem of the working case.
The data categories that can be processed for deletion are available in a pull-down list in [Delete
Buses and Outaged Network Elements]. In addition, a checkbox selects the option to Remove
out-of-service ties to other subsystems.
Figure 7-31 shows the output following deletion of three ac lines in the savnw.sav case. These
branches were taken out-of-service before attempting to delete them.
7-27
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 7-31. Example of Removing Outaged Equipment Output
Section 5.14, Removing Specified Buses and Connected Equipment

Section 5.15, Deleting Equipment
Section 1.75, EXTR

Section 1.203, PURG
See also:
Section 3.6.3, Editing Functions

Section 3.6.4, Binding Data
7-28
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Scaling Loads, Generators, and/or Shunts
7.9 Scaling Loads, Generators, and/or Shunts

Activity SCAL
If generation is to be scaled, and a Type 3 bus is in the subsystem being scaled,
the working case must be solved to an acceptable mismatch level.
Power Flow > Changing > Scale generation, load, shunt (SCAL)
The load, generation and shunt scaling activity SCAL enables the user to uniformly increase or
decrease any or all of the following quantities for a specified grouping of loads, fixed shunts, and
machines:
Load active power.
Load reactive power.
Active component of fixed bus shunt admittance.
Positive reactive component of fixed bus shunt admittance (capacitors).
Negative reactive component of fixed bus shunt admittance (reactors).
Generator active power output (positive generation).
Motor active power output (negative generation).
The [Scale Powerflow Data] dialog (Figure 7-32) enables the user to designate for scaling either
the entire working case or a specified bus subsystem (refer to Section 4.8, Subsystem Selection of
the PSSE Program Operation Manual). A bus subsystem may be specified either via a [Bus
Subsystem Selector] dialog by clicking [Select...], or by entering buses directly in the [Scale
Powerflow Data] dialog.
Figure 7-32. Scale Powerflow Data Dialog to Specify Subsystem
7-29
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Click [Go] to open a second [Scale Power Flow Data] dialog (Figure 7-33) where scaling targets
for the data categories to be scaled may be specified.
Figure 7-33. Scale Powerflow Data Dialog to Enter Scaling Targets
7-30
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 7-34. Example of Scaling Output
PSS E ProgramProgram Operation Manual,
Section 5.10, Scaling Loads, Generators, and/or Shunts

PSSE Application Program Interface (API), Section 1.273, SCAL
7-31

Changing Adjustment Enable Flags of Transformers
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
7.10 Changing Adjustment Enable Flags of Transformers

Activity TFLG
Power Flow > Changing > Transformer adjustment flags (TFLG)
The transformer adjustment enable flag setting activity TFLG allows the user to either enable or
disable the adjustment status of all automatically adjustable transformer windings contained in the
subsystem specified by the user.
The [Transformer Adjustment Flags] dialog (Figure 7-35) enables the user to designate for
processing either the entire working case or a specified bus subsystem (refer to Section 4.8,
Subsystem Selection of the PSSE Program Operation Manual). A bus subsystem may be specified either via a [Bus Subsystem Selector] dialog by clicking [Select...], or by entering buses
directly in the [Transformer Adjustment Flags] dialog.
The setting to be assigned to the adjustment enable flags of automatically adjustable transformer
windings contained in the specified subsystem is specified via the Allow automatic adjustment
checkbox.
Figure 7-35. Transformer Adjustment Flags Dialog
Section 5.31, Changing Adjustment Enable Flags of Transformers

PSSE Application Program Interface (API), Section 1.309, TFLG
7-32
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Importing an ECDI Data File
7.11 Importing an ECDI Data File

Economic Dispatch Data File (*.ecd)
File > Import > ECDI File
The file selection window lists only Files of type: Economic Dispatch Data file (*.ecd). Highlight the
desired file and click [Open]. The economic dispatch data is read into the working case.
Section 5.32.1, Economic Dispatch Data File Contents
7-33
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Changing Area Assignments
7.12 Changing Area Assignments

Activity ARNM
Activity LDAR
Power Flow > Renumbering Areas / Owners / Zones
The area renumbering activity ARNM reassigns buses and/or loads in the working case from their
original areas to a designated area. All buses and/or loads in the working case may be reassigned
to a designated area; more typically, buses and/or loads in a specified subsystem of the working
case are assigned to a designated area.
To change area assignments, select the Area assignments tab of the [Renumbering Areas /
Owners / Zones] dialog (Figure 7-36).
The [Renumbering Areas / Owners / Zones] dialog enables the user to designate for area renumbering either the entire working case or a specified bus subsystem (refer to Section 4.8, Subsystem
Selection of the PSSE Program Operation Manual). A bus subsystem may be specified either via
a [Bus Subsystem Selector] dialog by clicking [Select...], or by entering buses directly in the
[Renumbering Areas / Owners / Zones] dialog
Use the Reassign radio button to indicate if only buses, only loads, or both buses and loads in the
designated subsystem are to have their area assignments changed.
Select the area to which subsystem buses and/or loads are to be assigned by highlighting an entry
in either the Used areas scrolled list or the Unused areas scrolled list.
Click [OK] or [Apply] to implement the area reassignments; a summary is printed at the Progress
device. When [OK] is used, the [Renumbering Areas / Owners / Zones] dialog is dismissed; when
[Apply] is used, the dialog remains and additional renumbering may be implemented.
7-34
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Changing Area Assignments
Figure 7-36. Renumbering Areas/Owners/Zones Dialog: Area Assignments

Tab
PSS E Program Operation Manual:
Section 5.22, Changing Area Assignments

Areas, Zones and Owners
7-35
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Changing Owner Assignments
7.13 Changing Owner Assignments

Activity OWNM
The owner renumbering activity OWNM reassigns buses, loads, machines, branches, FACTS
devices and/or VSC dc lines in the working case from their original owners to a designated owner.
All elements of the selected equipment types in the working case may be reassigned to a designated owner; more typically, all elements of the selected equipment types in a specified subsystem
of the working case are assigned to a designated owner.
To change owner assignments, select the Owner assignments tab of the [Renumbering Areas /
The [Renumbering Areas / Owners / Zones] dialog enables the user to designate for owner
renumbering either the entire working case or a specified bus subsystem (refer to Section 4.8,
directly in the [Renumbering Areas / Owners / Zones] dialog.
Use the Reassign check boxes to indicate one or more of the following equipment types for which
elements in the designated subsystem are to have their owner assignments changed:
Buses
Branches (non-transformers branches and transformers)
Loads
FACTS devices
Machines
VSC dc lines
When one or more of branches, FACTS devices, and VSC dc lines have been selected, the Branch
reassignment options pull-down list is used to select for owner reassignment of series elements
either:
Subsystem branches only
Subsystem tie lines only
Subsystem branches and tie lines
Select the owner to which subsystem elements are to be assigned by highlighting an entry in either
the Used owners scrolled list or the Unused owners scrolled list.
Click [OK] or [Apply] to implement the owner reassignments; a summary is printed at the Progress
7-36
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Changing Owner Assignments
Figure 7-37. Renumbering Areas/Owners/Zones Dialog: Owner Assignments

Tab
Section 5.23, Changing Owner Assignments

7-37
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Changing Zone Assignments
7.14 Changing Zone Assignments

Activity ZONM
Activity LDZO
The zone renumbering activity ZONM reassigns buses and/or loads in the working case from their
original zones to a designated zone. All buses and/or loads in the working case may be reassigned
to a designated zone; more typically, buses and/or loads in a specified subsystem of the working
case are assigned to a designated zone.
To change zone assignments, select the Zone assignments tab of the [Renumbering Areas /
The [Renumbering Areas / Owners / Zones] dialog enables the user to designate for zone renumbering either the entire working case or a specified bus subsystem (refer to Section 4.8, Subsystem
Selection of the PSSE Program Operation Manual). A bus subsystem may be specified either via
a [Bus Subsystem Selector] dialog by clicking [Select...], or by entering buses directly in the
[Renumbering Areas / Owners / Zones] dialog
Use the Reassign radio button to indicate if only buses, only loads, or both buses and loads in the
designated subsystem are to have their zone assignments changed.
Select the zone to which subsystem buses and/or loads are to be assigned by highlighting an entry
in either the Used zones scrolled list or the Unused zones scrolled list.
7-38
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 7-38. Renumbering Areas/Owners/Zones Dialog: Zone Assignments

Tab
Click [OK] or [Apply] to implement the zone reassignments; a summary is printed at the Progress
7-39
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 7-39. Zone Reassignment Output
Section 5.24, Changing Zone Assignments

7-40
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Renumbering Buses
7.15 Renumbering Buses

Activity BSNM
The bus renumbering activity BSNM enables the user to change the bus numbers of specified
network buses in the working case and retain a tabulation, normally in file form, of the bus number
changes made.
Access to the various bus renumbering methods available in activity BSNM is supplied by four
dialogs corresponding to four menu entries available in the GUI.
The option for the handling of the output tabulation records produced by activity BSNM is specified
in the Select output destination area on each BSNM dialog. The following options are available:
Click the Data file radio button on the dialog to preserve the output tabulation records
in a Bus Renumbering Translation File. The name of the Bus Renumbering Translation
File may be specified either via a file selector dialog by clicking [...] next to the input
field, or by entering its name directly in the input field next to the Data file radio button.
Click the Report window radio button on the dialog to write the output tabulation records
to the Report device.
Click the No output radio button on the dialog to suppress the writing of the output tabulation records.
7.15.1 Renumbering Buses by Bus Number

Power Flow > Renumber Buses > By Bus Number
The [Renumber Buses by Bus Number] dialog (Figure 7-40) is used to renumber buses using the
bus number to bus number translation method. See Section 7.15, Renumbering Buses for a
description of the Select output destination area.
7-41
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Renumbering Buses
Figure 7-40. Renumber Buses by Bus Number Dialog
7.0.0.1 File Input

If bus number pairs are to be supplied in a Bus Renumbering Translation File, its name is specified
in the Bus translation file field. The name of the file may be specified either via a file selector dialog
by clicking [...] next to the input field, or by entering its name directly in the input field. Then click
[Go] to complete the renumbering process and dismiss the dialog.
7.0.0.2 Dialog Input

If bus number pairs are to be specified on the dialog, the old and new bus numbers are entered in
the Old bus number and New bus number fields, respectively.
The old bus number may be entered directly in the Old bus number input field. Alternatively,
[Select...] adjacent to the input field may be used to open the [Bus Selection] dialog (Figure 7-3)
where the desired bus may be specified by double-clicking on an entry in the selection list; click
[Filter] to open a [Bus Filter] dialog (Figure 7-4) to apply filtering criteria to limit the number of
buses in the selection list.
Click [Go] to implement the specified bus number change. The dialog remains and another bus
number pair may be specified, or click [Close] to end activity BSNM.
7.15.2 Renumbering Buses by Name

Power Flow > Renumber Buses > By Bus Name
The [Renumber Buses by Bus Name] dialog (Figure 7-41) is used to renumber buses using the
bus name to bus number translation method. See Section 7.15, Renumbering Buses for a description of the Select output destination area.
7-42
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Renumbering Buses
Figure 7-41. Renumber Buses by Bus Name Dialog
7.0.0.3 File Input

If bus name, number pairs are to be supplied in an input data file, its name is specified in the Bus
translation file field. The name of the file may be specified either via a file selector dialog by clicking
[...] next to the input field, or by entering its name directly in the input field. Then click [Go] to
complete the renumbering process and dismiss the dialog.
7.0.0.4 Dialog Input

If bus name, number pairs are to be specified on the dialog, the extended bus name and new bus
number are entered in the Old bus name and New bus number fields, respectively.
The old bus name may be entered directly in the Old bus name input field. Alternatively, [Select...]
adjacent to the input field may be used to open the [Bus Selection] dialog (Figure 7-3) where the
desired bus may be specified by double-clicking on an entry in the selection list; click [Filter] to
open a [Bus Filter] dialog (Figure 7-4) to apply filtering criteria to limit the number of buses in the
selection list.
Click [Go] to implement the specified bus number change. The dialog remains and another bus
name, number pair may be specified, or click [Close] to end activity BSNM.
7.15.3 Renumbering Buses by Packing

Power Flow > Renumber Buses > By Packing
The [Renumber Buses by Bus Packing] dialog (Figure 7-42) is used to renumber buses using the
bus number packing translation method. See Section 7.15, Renumbering Buses for a description
of the Select output destination area.
7-43
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Renumbering Buses
Figure 7-42. Renumber Buses by Bus Packing Dialog

The numbers defining the bus number range are entered in the Pack starting bus number and Pack
ending bus number fields.
Click [Go] to implement the packing of bus numbers in the specified range into the low end of the
range. The dialog remains and another bus range may be specified, or click [Close] to end activity
BSNM.
7.15.4 Renumbering Buses By Subsystem

Power Flow > Renumber Buses > By Subsystem
The [Renumber Buses by Subsystem] dialog (Figure 7-43) is used to renumber buses using any
of the following bus renumbering methods:
All buses without area blocking method.
All buses with area blocking method.
Subsystem bus number range method.
Subsystem bus number offset method.
See Section 7.15, Renumbering Buses for a description of the Select output destination area.
7-44
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Renumbering Buses
Figure 7-43. Renumber Buses by Subsystem Dialog
7.0.0.5 All Buses Without Area Blocking

To renumber buses using the all buses without area blocking renumbering method, enter the
following on the dialog:
In the Select Subsystem area, select the All buses radio button.
Uncheck the Block bus numbers by area checkbox.
In the New bus number range area, specify the appropriate value in the Starting bus
number field.
Then click [Go] to complete the renumbering process and dismiss the dialog.
7.0.0.6 All Buses With Area Blocking

To renumber buses using the all buses with area blocking renumbering method, enter the following
on the dialog:
In the Select Subsystem area, select the All buses radio button.
Check the Block bus numbers by area checkbox.
Then click [Go] to open the [Block Numbers By Area] dialog (see Figure 7-44).
7-45
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Renumbering Buses
Figure 7-44. Example of Block Numbers By Area Dialog

The [Block Numbers By Area] dialog contains an entry for each area in the working case that has
at least one bus assigned to it. Specify a new bus number range for each area on the dialog.Then
click [Go] to complete the renumbering process and dismiss the dialog.
No bus number changes are implemented until new number ranges are specified for all areas
shown on the dialog. Consequently, unless non-zero bus numbers are entered to indicate the
bus number ranges for each area on the dialog, the renumbering process will not be initiated.
7.0.0.7 Subsystem Bus Number Range

To renumber buses in a bus subsystem using the bus number range method, enter the following on
the dialog:
In the Select Subsystem area, select the Selected bus subsystem radio button.
Unless the current bus subsystem is to be processed, click [Select...] to specify a bus
subsystem via a [Bus Subsystem Selector].
In the Select re-numbering method area, select the New bus number range radio
button.
In the New bus number range area, specify the appropriate values in the Starting bus
number and Ending bus number fields.
Click [Go] to implement the specified subsystem renumbering. The dialog remains and another bus
subsystem may be renumbered, or click [Close] to end activity BSNM.
7-46
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Renumbering Buses
7.0.0.8 Subsystem Bus Number Offset

To renumber buses in a bus subsystem using the bus number offset method, enter the following on
the dialog:
In the Select Subsystem area, select the Selected bus subsystem radio button.
Unless the current bus subsystem is to be processed, click [Select...] to specify a bus
subsystem via a [Bus Subsystem Selector].
In the Select re-numbering method area, select the Bus number offset radio button.
In the New bus number range area, specify the appropriate value in the Bus number
offset field.
Click [Go] to implement the specified subsystem renumbering. The dialog remains and another bus
subsystem may be renumbered, or click [Close] to end activity BSNM.
Section 5.46, Bus Renumbering

PSSE Application Program Interface (API),
Section 1.44, BSNM
7-47
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Renumbering Buses in Auxiliary Data Files
7.16 Renumbering Buses in Auxiliary Data Files

Activity RNFI
A Bus Renumbering Translation File must be available.
File > Renumber buses in auxiliary files (RNFI)
The auxiliary data input file bus renumbering activity RNFI reflects changes in bus numbering in
auxiliary data input files. It is used primarily in conjunction with activity BSNM to coordinate bus
renumbering implemented in a Saved Case with auxiliary data input files associated with the Saved
Case and read by other PSSExpress activities.
The [Renumber Buses in Auxiliary Files] dialog (Figure 7-45) is available only when using
[Spreadsheet].
Figure 7-45. Renumber Buses in Auxiliary Files Dialog

First, select the type of file to be processed from the Auxiliary data file type pull-down list. An abbreviation for the activity that requires the file type appears in parentheses, as follows:
Sequence data (RESQ)
Capability curve data (GCAP)
Dynamics data (DYRE)
Load throwover data (ACCC)
Machine impedance data (MCRE)
Fault specification data (ANSI)
Dispatch data (ECDI)
Subsystem description data (ACCC)
Dispatch data (INLF)
Monitored element data (ACCC)
Breaker duty data (BKDY)
Contingency description data (ACCC)
Fault specification data (BKDY)
Tripping data (ACCC)
Fault control data (ASCC)
7-48
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Then specify the files to be used by activity RNFI.
Bus Number Translation file (*.trn)
Auxiliary Data file (files corresponding to Auxiliary data file type)
Output data file (files corresponding to Auxiliary data file type)
For each of these files, its name may be typed directly in its input field, or you can click [...] next to
the input field to specify the name of the file from a file selector dialog.
Section 5.21, Renumbering Buses in Auxiliary Files

Section 5.46, Bus Renumbering
PSSE Application Program Interface (API), Section 1.265, RNFI
7-49
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

7-50
Chapter 8
Data Reports
Chapter 8 - Data Reports
8.1 Working Case Data Reporting
Power Flow > List Data
PSSExpress facilitates the listing of all data in the working case for viewing, problem checking, or
case documentation.
Through the [List Data] dialog (Figure 8-1), the following tabulations of working case data can be
produced:
Categories of power flow data in tabular form (activity LIST).
Power flow data grouped together on a bus-by-bus basis (activity EXAM).
Categories of optimal power flow data in tabular form (activity LSTO).
Outaged network elements (activity OUTS).
Fixed and/or switched bus shunts (activity SHNT).
Extended bus names in alphabetic order (activity ALPH).
Click the radio button on the [List Data] dialog corresponding to the desired reporting function. If
the selected function has provision for reporting options, the corresponding controls on the dialog
are enabled.
The [List Data] dialog enables the user to designate for processing either the entire working case
or a specified bus subsystem (refer to Section 4.8, Subsystem Selection of the PSSE Program
Operation Manual). A bus subsystem may be specified either via a [Bus Subsystem Selector]
dialog by clicking [Select...], or by entering buses directly in the [List Data] dialog.
Reports are routed to the Report device.
8-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Data Reports
Working Case Data Reporting
Figure 8-1. List Data Dialog
8.1.1 Power Flow Data

Activity LIST
8-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Data Reports
The data listing activity LIST tabulates the power flow working case in a form suitable for problem
data documentation. The report generated by activity LIST is separated into several categories of
data.
Activity LIST is accessible from the Powerflow radio button of the [List Data] dialog (Figure 8-1).
The data category to be tabulated is selected from the drop down list next to the Powerflow radio
button on the dialog. The Output voltage radio buttons provide for the tabulation of ac voltages in
either per unit or kilovolts. The Use double entry branch method check box is used to select either
single or double entry format for branch related category reports when either the All data or
Branches report is specified in the drop down list.
Section 5.37, Displaying Power Flow Data

Section 1.110, LIST
8.1.2 Listing Buses in Alphabetical Order

Activity ALPH
The bus alphabetic listing activity ALPH prints an alphabetically sorted table of all buses in a specified subsystem of the working case.
Activity ALPH is accessible from the Bus names radio button of the [List Data] dialog (Figure 8-1).
8-3
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Data Reports
Section 5.39, Listing Buses in Alphabetical Order

Section 1.26, ALPH
8.1.3 Listing Buses and their Connected Equipment

Activity EXAM
The data examination activity EXAM produces a tabulation of power flow data organized by bus.
For each bus tabulated, its bus data is followed by the data associated with each network element
that is connected to the bus.
Activity EXAM is accessible from the Examine Powerflow / sequence data radio button of the [List
Data] dialog (Figure 8-1). The sequence data check box must be unchecked.
Section 5.38, Listing Components of a Bus

Section 1.74, EXAM
8.1.4 Outaged Equipment

Activity OUTS
8-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Data Reports
The outaged equipment reporting activity OUTS tabulates those components in the working case
that are removed from service.
Activity OUTS is accessible from the Outaged equipment radio button of the [List Data] dialog
(Figure 8-1).
Section 5.42, Listing Outaged Equipment

Section 1.180, OUTS
8.1.5 Listing Bus Shunts

Activity SHNT
The bus shunt summary activity SHNT tabulates fixed and/or switched bus shunts contained in the
working case.
Activity SHNT is accessible from the Bus shunts radio button of the [List Data] dialog (Figure 8-1).
The type(s) of bus shunts to be tabulated is selected from the Report drop down list below the Bus
shunts radio button on the dialog.
Section 5.41, Listing Bus Shunts

Section 1.289, SHNT
8-5
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Data Reports
Listing File Information
8.2 Listing File Information

File > File information (SIZE/SHOW/BUSN)
Figure 8-2. File Information Dialog

Three reports are available from the [File Information] dialog:
System Components
Saved Case and Snapshot Filenames
Unused Bus Numbers
8.2.1 System Components

Activity SIZE
The working case must contain a non-null case..
The case size summary activity SIZE tabulates the number of components in the working case,
along with the maximum number permitted at the current size level of PSSExpress working
memory.
Activity SIZE is accessible from the List the number of system components radio button of the [File
Information] dialog.
8-6
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Data Reports
Section 5.34.3, Editing the Two-Line Case Title or the Long Title
Section 1.295, SIZE
8.2.2 Saved Case and Snapshot Filenames

Activity SHOW
Selecting the List Save case and Snapshot titles option produces a report of filenames in the current
working directory. The user may specify whether to open the [Select file to display title] dialog,
only Powerflow Save cases, only Dynamics Snapshot files, or All Save cases and Snapshot files.
Specific information on this option may be found at Section 6.2, Listing Saved Case Filenames and
Section 20.7, Listing Snapshot Filenames.
Section 18.14, Listing Saved Case or Snapshot Files
8.2.3 Unused Bus Numbers

Activity BUSN
The unused bus number summary activity BUSN tabulates those numbers, from within a user specified bus number range, which are not assigned to buses in the working case.
Activity BUSN is accessible from the List unused bus numbers in a range radio button of the [File
Information] dialog. The bus number range is specified in the Starting bus and Ending bus input
fields on the dialog.
Section 5.36, Listing Unused Bus Numbers

Section 1.48, BUSN
8-7
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Data Reports
This page intentionally left blank.
8-8
Chapter 9
Case Comparison
Chapter 9 - Case Comparison
9.1 Comparing Power Flow Case Totals

Activity CMPR
If losses, mismatches, or interchange are to be compared, both cases should be solved to an
acceptable mismatch level.
File > Compare
The [Compare Case Totals] dialog (Figure 9-1) creates a report comparing working case totals by
area, owner, or zone with a specified saved case. Click [ ] to open the selection window for the
required Saved Case file (*.sav). Click [Go] to perform the activity. The comparison is routed to the
Report tab by default (Figure 9-2).
You will need to click [Close] to end this activity.
9-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Case Comparison
Comparing Power Flow Case Totals
Figure 9-1. Compare Case Totals Dialog
Figure 9-2. Example of Compare Case Totals Report
Section 11.26, Comparing Power Flow Case Totals
9-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Case Comparison
Comparing Power Flow Cases
9.2 Comparing Power Flow Cases

Activity DIFF
If bus voltages, line flows, or line losses are to be compared,
both cases should be solved to an acceptable mismatch level.
---

File > Compare
The [Compare Powerflow Cases] dialog (Figure 9-3) creates a report comparing a specified bus
subsystem quantity in the working case with a saved case. Click [ ] to open the selection window
for the required Saved Case file (*.sav).
Figure 9-3. Compare Power Flow Cases Dialog
9-3
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Case Comparison
Click [Go] to open the [Select Powerflow Comparison Options] dialog (Figure 9-4).
Figure 9-4. Select Powerflow Comparison Options Dialog

The dialog activates comparison threshold values, load characteristics, or ratings appropriate to the
specification of one of the following quantities:
Bus identifiers
Negative sequence bus shunts
Zero sequence mutuals
Bus type codes
Zero sequence bus shunts
Multi-section lines
Machine status
Branch status
Multi-section line metered end
Generator MW
Line R, X, B
Bus load status
Generator MW or MVAR
Line shunts
Line lengths
Bus loads
Line ratings
Generator MVAR
Bus shunts
Metered end
Flows MW (from bus)
Switched shunts
Transformers
Flows MVAR (from bus)
Voltage
Flows MW or MVAR (from bus)
Flows MW (from & to)
Voltage and angle
Flows MW or MVAR (from & to)
Flows MVAR (from & to)
MBASE & ZSORCE
Line MW or MVAR losses
Line MW losses
MBASE & ZPOS
Zero sequence R, X, B
Line MVAR losses
MBASE & ZNEG
Zero sequence line shunts
Fixed shunt status
MBASE & ZZERO
Connection codes
Switched shunt status
Bus load characteristics that may be compared include one of the following quantities:
Total nominal load
Constant current
Constant MVA
Constant admittance
9-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Case Comparison
Click [Compare] to perform the activity. The comparison is routed to the Report tab by default
(Figure 9-5).
Figure 9-5. Example of Compare Cases Report
Section 11.26, Comparing Power Flow Case Totals
9-5
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Case Comparison
Comparing AC Tie Branches
9.3 Comparing AC Tie Branches

Activity DFTI
If line flows or line losses are to be compared, both cases should be solved to an
acceptable mismatch level.
---

File > Compare
The [Compare Tie Lines] dialog (Figure 9-6) creates a report comparing a specified tie line quantity in the working case with a specified saved case. Click [ ] to open the selection window for the
required Saved Case file (*.sav).
Figure 9-6. Compare Tie Lines Dialog
9-6
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Case Comparison
Click [Go] to open the [Select Tie Line Comparison Options] dialog (Figure 9-7).
Figure 9-7. Select Tie Line Comparison Options Dialog

The dialog activates comparison threshold values or ratings appropriate to the specification of one
of the following quantities:
Branch status
Zero sequence R, X, B
Line R, X, B
Zero sequence line shunts
Line shunts
Connection codes
Line ratings
Flow MW (from bus)
Metered end
Flow MVAR (from bus)
Line length
Flow MW (from & to)
Transformers
Flow MVAR (from & to)
Flows MW or MVAR (from bus)
Line MW losses
Flows MW or MVAR (from & to)
Line MVAR losses
Line MW or MVAR losses
Click [Compare] to perform the activity. The comparison is routed to the Report tab by default
Section 11.29, Comparing AC Tie Branches
9-7
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Case Comparison
This page intentionally left blank.
9-8
Chapter 10
Creating Power Flow
Data Files
Chapter 10 - Creating Power Flow Data Files
10.1 Creating a Saved Case File

Activity SAVE
File > Save
The case saving activity SAVE stores the working case into a user-specified Saved Case file in a
compressed format.
Activity SAVE is accessible from the Case Data tab of the [Save Network Data] dialog (Figure 101). The Saved Case File may be specified either via a file selector dialog by clicking [...] next to the
input field, or by entering its name directly in the input field.
Click [OK] to save the working case in the designated file.
10-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Creating Power Flow Data Files

Creating a Saved Case File
Figure 10-1. Save Network Data Dialog, Case Data
Section 5.45, Creating a Saved Case File

Section 1.271, SAVE
10-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Saving the Working Case in an IEEE Common Format File
10.2 Saving the Working Case in an IEEE Common Format File

Activity RWCM
The working case must contain a validly specified power flow case
solved to an acceptable mismatch level.
File > Save
The IEEE Common Format output activity RWCM writes the working case as a file in IEEE common
tape format data records.
Activity RWCM is accessible from the IEEE Format Power Flow Data tab of the [Save Network
Data] dialog (Figure 10-2).
To write the data records to a file, select the Data file radio button in the Destination area of the
dialog. The name of the file may be specified either via a file selector dialog by clicking [...] next to
the input field, or by entering its name directly in the input field.
To write the data records to the Report device, select the Report window radio button in the Destination area of the dialog.
To ignore dc lines and FACTS devices in the data records, uncheck the Add power to loads
checkbox; to represent their power injections as load, check the Add power to loads checkbox.
Click [OK] to save the working case in the designated file in the IEEE format.
10-3

Saving the Working Case in an IEEE Common Format File
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure 10-2. Save Network Data Dialog, IEEE Common Format
Section 5.47, Saving the Working Case in an IEEE Common Format File
Section 1.266, RWCM
10-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Saving Machine Impedance Data
10.3 Saving Machine Impedance Data

Activity RWMA
If generator reactive powers are to be used in calculating the reactive power split fractions,
the case must be solved to an acceptable mismatch level.
Machine impedance data (MBASE, ZSORCE, XTRAN, and GENTAP) must be correctly specified
for those machines to be processed.
File > Save
The machine impedance data output activity RWMA writes out machine parametric data from the
working case in the form of a Machine Impedance Data File.
Activity RWMA is accessible from the Machine Impedance Data tab of the [Save Network Data]
dialog (Figure 10-3).
To exclude data data records for out-of-service machines, uncheck the Include records for out-ofservice machines checkbox; to include them, check the Include records for out-of-service machines
checkbox.
Designate the quantities to be used in calculating the active and reactive power split fractions by
selecting the appropriate entries from the two drop-down lists in the Machine Impedance area of
the dialog.
The [Save Network Data] dialog enables the user to designate for processing either the entire
working case or a specified bus subsystem (refer to Section 4.8, Subsystem Selection of the
PSS E Program Operation Manual). A bus subsystem may be specified either via a [Bus
Subsystem Selector] dialog by clicking [Select...], or by entering buses directly in the [Save
Network Data] dialog.
Click [OK] to save the machine parametric data in Machine Impedance Data File format.
10-5
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Saving Machine Impedance Data
Figure 10-3. Save Network Data Dialog, Machine Impedance Data
Section 5.48, Saving Machine Impedance Data

Section 1.267, RWMA
10-6
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

10.4 Creating a Power Flow Raw Data File

Activity RAWD
File > Save
The Raw Data File output activity RAWD writes the working case in the form of a Power Flow Raw
Data File. That is, when directed to a file, the data records written by activity RAWD are in a format
suitable for input to activity READ.
Activity RAWD is accessible from the Power Flow Raw Data tab of the [Save Network Data] dialog
(Figure 10-4).
The user must designate the intended use of the Power Flow Raw Data File by selecting one of the
following entries from the Configure RAW file to drop-down list:
Initialize working case: suitable for use by activity READ with IC on the first data record
set to 0 (default).
Add to working case: suitable for use by activity READ with IC on the first data record
set to 1.
Use with RDCH: suitable for use by activity RDCH (i.e., the three case identification
data records are omitted).
The [Save Network Data] dialog enables the user to designate for processing either the entire
Subsystem Selector] dialog by clicking [Select...], or by entering buses directly in the [Save
Network Data] dialog. If the All area ties radio button is selected, RAWD writes data records only
for branches between areas.
Options to be used in writing Power Flow Raw Data records are specified via checkboxes and a
drop-down list in the Include area of the dialog. The checkboxes provide options to include network
components: isolated buses, out of service branches, subsystem data, subsystem tie lines, and/or
bus names. The drop-down list selects of one of the following load options:
Include all loads at subsystem buses
Include subsystem loads at all buses
Include all loads at subsystem buses and subsystem loads at non-subsystem buses
10-7
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Click [OK] to save the power flow data in Power Flow Raw Data File format.
Figure 10-4. Save Network Data Dialog, Power Flow Raw Data

Section 5.2.1, Power Flow Raw Data File Contents
Section 1.246, RAWD_2
10-8
Chapter 11
Power Flow Solutions
The Power Flow menu provides access to most of the PSSExpress steady-state analyses.
Included are the power flow solutions for both ac and dc network analysis, data access and listing,
network, dispatch, load and topology manipulations. Methods are available for checking network
conditions and exporting results. Analysis methods provided in the power flow menu include the
following:
Chapter 11 - Power Flow Solutions
Decoupled Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution (Section 11.2.1)
Fully-Coupled Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution (Section 11.2.2)
Fixed Slope Decoupled Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution (Section 11.2.3)
Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution with Inertial Governot Dispatch (Section 11.2.4)
Gauss-Seidel Power Flow Solution (Section 11.2.5)
AC Contingency Analysis (Section )
Short-circuit analysis (Chapter 15), the Optimal Power Flow (Chapter 19), transmission access
analysis (Chapter 18), and dynamic simulation and disturbances (Chapter 21) methods are available on separate menus.
11-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Specifying Solution Parameters
11.1 Specifying Solution Parameters

11.1.1 Boundary Conditions
The constant power characteristic holds the load power constant as long as the bus voltage
exceeds the value specified by the modifiable parameter PQBRAK. The [Solution Parameters]
dialog General tab provides access to this parameter. Notification of the change is routed to the
Progress tab.
Figure 11-1. Power Flow Solution Parameters Dialog
Section 6.3.19, Characteristics of Activity SOLV
11-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

11.1.2 Gauss-Seidel Controls
On the Gauss tab of [Solution Parameters], changes can be made to the acceleration factors,
ACCP/ACCQ, and the TOL and ITMX parameters. The BLOWUP parameter is available on the
General tab.
Figure 11-2. Power Flow Solution Parameters Dialog, Gauss
Load Data
11.1.3 Newton-Raphson Solution Controls
On the Newton tab of [Solution Parameters], changes can be made to the the following:
11-3
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

ACCN - the acceleration factor
TOL - the largest mismatch in MW and Mvar
ITMXN - the maximum number of iterations
DVLIM - the largest change in bus voltage
NDVFCT - the non-divergent improvement factor
VCTOLQ - the controlled bus Q mismatch convergence tolerance
VCTOLV - the controlled bus voltage error convergence tolerance
The BLOWUP parameter is available on the General tab.
Figure 11-3. Power Flow Solution Parameters Dialog, Newton
Section 6.5.1, Characteristics of Activity FNSL
11-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Running Power Flow Solutions
11.2 Running Power Flow Solutions

11.2.1 Decoupled Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution
Activity NSOL
Validly specified power flow case with voltages that are a reasonable estimate of a solution.
Power Flow > Solution > Solve (NSOL/FNSL/FDNS/SOLV/MSLV)
The three Newton-Raphson iterative algorithms solve for the bus voltages needed to satisfy the bus
boundary conditions contained in the working case. The [Loadflow Solutions] dialog (Figure 114) provides options for all three Newton-Raphson solution methods.
The toolbar button opens [Loadflow Solutions] or automatically executes the previously
used solution method without opening the dialog. To re-open the dialog for each analysis,
enable the option Show this window when using the Solve toolbar button.
Newton-Raphson controls are modified using [Solution Parameters]. See Section 11.1.3.
Automatic adjustments that allow maneuvering the system to meet specified voltage, branch flow,
and area net interchange schedules are enabled or disabled using [Program Settings]. See
Changing Program Settings. The user must specify Solution options for Tap adjustment, Switched
shunt adjustments and Area interchange control; these options override automatic adjustments.
Checkboxes to enable/disable Solution options for Flat start, Adjust phase shift, and Adjust DC taps
are also available. VAR limits may also be specified to control the number of iterations during which
generator reactive power limits will first be applied.
Click [Solve] to process the working case. Solution output is routed to the Progress tab (Figure 115).
11-5
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 11-4. Loadflow Solutions Dialog, Newton-Raphson, Decoupled
11-6
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 11-5. Example of Newton-Raphson Decoupled Solution Output
Section 6.6, Applying Decoupled Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution
11.2.2 Fully-Coupled Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution

Activity FNSL
Activity FNSL requires the prior execution of activity ORDR. If the need for a new bus ordering is
detected, activity ORDR is automatically executed before beginning the voltage change calculation.
11-7
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Checkboxes to enable/disable Solution options for Flat start, Non-divergent solution, Adjust phase
shift, and Adjust DC taps are also available. VAR limits may also be specified to control the number
of iterations during which generator reactive power limits will first be applied.
Figure 11-6. Loadflow Solutions Dialog, Newton-Raphson, Fully-Coupled
11-8
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 11-7. Example of Newton-Raphson Fully-Coupled Solution Output
Section 6.5, Applying Fully-Coupled Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution
11.2.3 Fixed Slope Decoupled Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution

Activity FDNS
11-9
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Checkboxes to enable/disable Solution options for Flat start, Non-divergent solution, Adjust phase
shift, and Adjust DC taps are also available. VAR limits may also be specified to control the number
of iterations during which generator reactive power limits will first be applied.
11-10
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 11-8. Loadflow Solutions Dialog, Newton-Raphson, Fixed Slope

Decoupled
11-11
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 11-9. Example of Newton-Raphson Fixed Slope Decoupled Solution

Output
Section 6.7, Applying Fixed Slope Decoupled Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution
11.2.4 Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution with Inertial / Governor

Dispatch
Activity INLF
Validly specified power flow case, solved in the pre-event condition.
No prior power flow solution activities in working case.
Unit Inertia and Governor Data File (*.inl) containing machine data
for all in-service machines.
Power Flow > Solution > N-R solution with inertial / governor dispatch (INLF)
The [N-R Solution with Inertial / Governor Redispatch] dialog requires specification of Solution
options, Switched shunt adjustments, VAR limits, and the Solution type (Governor or Inertial). The
Governor solution requires specification of Plimits from among the following options:
Pre PSSExpress Rev-29 approach
0.0 to 1.0 for both types
Working case values for both types
11-12
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 11-10. N-R Solution with Inertial / Governor Redispatch Dialog

Click [ ] to open the selection window to save data in a Unit Inertia and Governor Data file (*.inl),
which can be a new file or a previously-built file to be over-written.
Area interchange control and the non-divergent solution option are always disabled in this
solution.
This activity modifies the data in the working case. If you wish to protect the original data, you
must save the redispatch data with a different filename.
11-13
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 11-11. Example of Newton-Raphson Solution with Governor

Redispatch
Section 6.8, Applying Newton-Raphson Power Flow Solution with Inertial / Governor
Dispatch
Section 6.8.1, Inertia and Governor Response Data File Contents
11.2.5 Gauss-Seidel Power Flow Solution

Activity SOLV
No series capacitors.
11-14
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

The Gauss-Seidel iterative algorithms solve for the bus voltages needed to satisfy the bus boundary
conditions contained in the working case. The [Loadflow Solutions] dialog (Figure 11-12) provides
options for either the Gauss-Seidel or Modified Gauss-Seidel solutions.
Gauss-Seidel controls are modified using [Solution Parameters]. See Section 11.1.2.
Changing Program Settings. The user must specify Solution options for Switched shunt adjustments and Area interchange control; these options override automatic adjustments.
Checkboxes to enable/disable Solution options for Flat start, Ignore Var limits, Adjust DC taps, and
Adjust taps are also available.
11-15
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 11-12. Loadflow Solutions Dialog, Gauss-Seidel
11-16
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 11-13. Example of Gauss-Seidel Solution Output
Section 6.3, Applying Gauss-Seidel Power Flow Solution
11.2.6 Modified Gauss-Seidel Power Flow Solution

Activity MSLV
The Gauss-Seidel iterative algorithms solve for the bus voltages needed to satisfy the bus boundary
conditions contained in the working case. The [Loadflow Solutions] dialog (Figure 11-14) provides
options for either the Gauss-Seidel or Modified Gauss-Seidel solutions.
Gauss-Seidel controls are modified using [Solution Parameters]. See Section 11.1.2.
Changing Program Settings. The user must specify Solution options for Switched shunt adjustments and Area interchange control; these options override automatic adjustments.
Checkboxes to enable/disable Solution options for Flat start, Ignore Var limits, Adjust DC taps, and
Adjust taps are also available.
Click [Solve] to process the working case. Solution output is routed to the Progress tab.
11-17
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 11-14. Loadflow Solutions Dialog, Modified Gauss-Seidel
Section 6.4, Applying Modified Gauss-Seidel Power Flow Solution
11-18
Chapter 12
Power Flow Data
Verification
PSSExpress provides a variety of means by which data can be validated in order to identify
suspect parameters, conflicting voltage controls, unacceptable tap controls, and isolated buses or
inadvertent islands. The data checking is accompanied by the generation of reports at the Report
device for examination.
Chapter 12 - Power Flow Data Verification
Data checking does not validate the state of a power flow solution.
12.1 Checking Branch Parameters

Activity BRCH
Power Flow > Check Data > Branch parameters (BRCH)
The branch parameter checking activity BRCH tabulates those branches where impedances or
other characteristics are such that they may be detrimental to the rate of convergence of one or
more of the power flow solution activities.
In the [Check Branch Parameters] dialog (Figure 12-1), one or more data checks may be
selected. Seven of the checks use limit or threshold values. The threshold values shown on the
dialog may be used, or you may specify different values that might be more appropriate for the
working case under examination. Threshold values are specified either by typing them directly in
the data value fields or by using the up and down arrow buttons next to each input field.
The check box for the final check, missing zero sequence impedance, is disabled if sequence data
is not present in the working case.
The [Check Branch Parameters] dialog enables the user to designate for processing either the
entire working case or a specified bus subsystem (refer to Section 4.8, Subsystem Selection of the
Subsystem Selector] dialog by clicking [Select...], or by entering buses directly in the [Check
Branch Parameters] dialog
12-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Data Verification

Checking Branch Parameters
Figure 12-1. Check Branch Parameters Dialog
Section 5.27, Checking Branch Parameters

PSSE Application Program Interface (API), Section 1.42, BRCH
12-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Checking/Changing Controlled Bus Scheduled Voltage
12.2 Checking/Changing Controlled Bus Scheduled Voltage

Activity CNTB
The working case must contain a validly specified power flow case
solved to an acceptable mismatch level.
Power Flow > Check Data > Check/Change controlled bus scheduled voltages (CNTB)
The bus scheduled voltage checking activity CNTB tabulates the voltage setpoints and desired
voltage bands of voltage controlling equipment in the working case, and, optionally, allows the user
to specify new scheduled voltages. It also performs certain checks on voltage controlling buses that
are not themselves voltage controlled buses. It may be instructed to process all such buses, or only
those with suspect or conflicting voltage schedules or other errors.
In the [Check / Change Controlled Bus Scheduled Voltages] dialog (Figure 12-2), three control
options are specified:
Process either all voltage controlled and controlling buses in the subsystem, or only
those with apparent conflicting voltage objective data or other errors:
Either operate in an interactive mode, in which new voltage schedules may be specified, or in a reporting mode:
Either include or omit Type 4 controlled buses and out-of-service or disabled controlling
equipment in its checking and reporting.
The [Check / Change Controlled Bus Scheduled Voltages] dialog enables the user to designate
for processing either the entire working case or a specified bus subsystem (refer to Section 4.8,
directly in the [Check / Change Controlled Bus Scheduled Voltages] dialog.
Figure 12-2. Check/Change Controlled Bus Scheduled Voltages Dialog
12-3

Checking/Changing Controlled Bus Scheduled Voltage
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
If the voltage schedule changing option was specified, as each voltage controlled bus is processed,
the user has the option of entering a new scheduled voltage (Figure 12-3).
Figure 12-3. Change Voltage Setpoint Dialog

Any voltage controlling transformers with load drop compensation that are controlling voltage at the
controlled bus being processed are listed. A new voltage band may be specified for any or all of
such transformers (Figure 12-4).
Figure 12-4. Change Vmin/Vmax Dialog
Section 5.29, Checking/Changing Controlled Bus Scheduled Voltage

PSSE Application Program Interface (API), Section 1.56, CNTB
12-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Checking/Changing Transformer Adjustment Data
12.3 Checking/Changing Transformer Adjustment Data

Activity TPCH
Power Flow > Check Data > Check / Change transformer adjustment data (TPCH)
The controlling transformer parameter checking activity TPCH performs several checks on the
adjustment data associated with voltage and flow controlling transformers.
In the [Check / Change Transformer Adjustment Data] dialog (Figure 12-5), data checks are
selected through check boxes. Those checks that use a threshold value have a value field next to
the test description; you may override any default threshold by typing the desired value in its field.
The [Check / Change Transformer Adjustment Data] dialog enables the user to designate for
processing either the entire working case or a specified bus subsystem (refer to Section 4.8,
directly in the [Check / Change Transformer Adjustment Data] dialog.
If any transformers are listed as failing a check, the user has the option of modifying the data of all
transformers tabulated (Figure 12-6).
12-5

PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure 12-5. Check/Change Transformer Adjustment Data Dialog
Figure 12-6. Change Transformer Tap Step Dialog
12-6
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Figure 12-7. Change Transformer Flow Band Dialog
Section 5.30, Checking/Changing Transformer Adjustment Data

PSSE Application Program Interface (API), Section 1.315, TPCH
12-7
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide

Check for Islands Without a Swing Bus
12.4 Check for Islands Without a Swing Bus

Activity TREE
Power Flow > Check Data > Buses not in swing tree (TREE)
The network continuity checking activity TREE enables the user to identify buses not connected
back to a Type 3 (swing) bus through the in-service ac network. It also tabulates in-service branches
connected to Type 4 (disconnected) buses. Each swingless island may optionally be disconnected.
For each swingless island is detected, a dialog is brought up which allows the user to select the next
action of activity TREE:
Click [Yes] to disconnect this island, and then check for another swingless island.
Click [No] to leave this island unchanged and check for another swingless island.
Click [Cancel] to leave this island unchanged and exit activity TREE.
Figure 12-8. Example Dialog of Activity TREE
Section 5.28, Check for Islands Without a Swing Bus

PSSE Application Program Interface (API), Section 1.319, TREE
12-8
Chapter 13
Power Flow Reports
Chapter 13 - Power Flow Reports
13.1 Area/Zone-Based Reports

13.1.1 Area-to-Area Interchange
Activity INTA
Validly specified power flow case solved to an acceptable mismatch tolerance.
Power Flow > Reports > Area / zone based reports
The [Area/Zone Based Reports] dialog (Figure 13-1) provides options for interchange reports and
tie line loading reports, of all subsystems or selected subsystems, by area or zone.
13-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Area/Zone-Based Reports
Figure 13-1. Area/Zone Based Reports Dialog, Area

Click [Go] to produce the report (Figure 13-2), which is displayed in the Report tab by default.
Figure 13-2. Example of Area Interchange Report
Section 11.11, Summarizing Area-to-Area Interchange
13-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

13.1.2 Zone-to-Zone Interchange

Activity INTZ
Figure 13-3. Area/Zone Based Reports Dialog, Zone

13-3
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Figure 13-4. Example of Zone Interchange Report
Section 11.12, Summarizing Zone-to-Zone Interchange
13.1.3 Loadings on Tie Lines from Interchange Areas

Activity TIES
13-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Figure 13-5. Area/Zone Based Reports Dialog, Area Tie Line Loadings
Figure 13-6. Example of Area Tie Line Loadings Report
Section 11.13, Summarizing Loadings on Ties from Interchange Areas
13-5
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

13.1.4 Loadings on Tie Lines from Zones

Activity TIEZ
Figure 13-7. Area/Zone Based Reports Dialog, Zone Tie Line Loadings
13-6
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Figure 13-8. Example of Zone Tie Line Loadings Report
Section 11.14, Summarizing Loadings on Ties from Zones
13-7
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Area/Owner/Zone Totals
13.2 Area/Owner/Zone Totals

13.2.1 Area Totals
Activity AREA
Power Flow > Reports > Area / owner / zone totals
The [Area/Owner/Zone Totals] dialog (Figure 13-9) provides options for subsystem totals, of all
subsystems or selected subsystems, by area, owner, or zone. The area report may also include
zone subtotals.
Figure 13-9. Area/Owner/Zone Totals Dialog, Area

13-8
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Figure 13-10. Example of Area Totals Report with Zone Subtotals
Section 11.7, Summarizing Area Totals
13.2.2 Owner Totals

Activity OWNR
subsystems or selected subsystems, by area, owner, or zone:
13-9
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Figure 13-11. Area/Owner/Zone Totals Dialog, Owner

13-10
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Figure 13-12. Example of Owner Totals Report
Section 11.8, Summarizing Owner Totals
13.2.3 Zone Totals

Activity ZONE
subsystems or selected subsystems, by area, owner, or zone. The zone report may also include
area subtotals.
13-11
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Figure 13-13. Area/Owner/Zone Totals Dialog, Zone

Figure 13-14. Example of Zone Totals Report
13-12
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Section 11.9, Summarizing Zone Totals
13-13
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Bus-Based Reports
13.3 Bus-Based Reports

Through the [Bus Based Reports] dialog (Figure 13-15), several power flow solution reports may
be obtained.
The [Bus Based Reports] dialog enables the user to designate for processing either the entire
Subsystem Selector] dialog by clicking [Select...], or by entering buses directly in the [Bus Based
Reports] dialog.
Click [Go] to produce the report . The report is written to the Report device.
13.3.1 Producing a Standard Power Flow Solution Report

Activity POUT
Power Flow > Reports > Bus based reports
In the [Bus Based Reports] dialog (Figure 13-15), select Powerflow output with the Wide format
output check box unchecked. Click [Go] to produce the report (Figure 13-16).
13-14
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Bus-Based Reports
Figure 13-15. Bus Based Reports Dialog, Standard Format
13-15
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Bus-Based Reports
Figure 13-16. Example of Standard Format Power Flow Solution Report
Section 11.2, Producing a Standard Power Flow Solution Report
13.3.2 Wide-Format Power Flow Solution Report

Activity LOUT
output check box checked and the Output with amps check box unchecked. Click [Go] to produce
the report (Figure 13-18).
13-16
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Bus-Based Reports
Figure 13-17. Bus Based Reports Dialog, Wide Format
Figure 13-18. Example of Wide Format Power Flow Solution Report
13-17
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Bus-Based Reports
Section 11.3, Producing a Wide-Format Power Flow Solution Report
13.3.3 Wide-Format Power Flow Solution Report with Branch Current

Loadings
Activity LAMP
output and Output with amps check boxes both checked. Click [Go] to produce the report
(Figure 13-20).
Figure 13-19. Bus Based Reports Dialog, Wide Format, with Branch Current
Loadings
13-18
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Bus-Based Reports
Figure 13-20. Example of Wide Format Power Flow Solution Report with
Branch Current Loadings
Section 11.4, Producing a Wide-Format Power Flow Solution Report in Amps
13.3.4 Summary of Subsystem Conditions

Activity SUBS
In the [Bus Based Reports] dialog (Figure 13-21), select Subsystem summary / totals. Click [Go]
to produce the report (Figure 13-22).
13-19
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Bus-Based Reports
Figure 13-21. Bus Based Reports Dialog, Subsystem Summary
13-20
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Bus-Based Reports
Figure 13-22. Example of Subsystem Summary Report
Section 11.5, Summarizing Subsystem Conditions
13.3.5 Summarizing Load Reduction

Activity LODR
The working case must contain a validly specified power flow case solved to an acceptable mismatch
tolerance.
13-21
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Bus-Based Reports
The load reduction reporting activity LODR summarizes the reduction in:
Nominal constant MVA load caused when voltage at a load bus falls below PQBRAK.
Nominal constant current load caused when voltage at a load bus falls below 0.5 pu.
In the [Bus Based Reports] dialog (Figure 13-23), select Load reduction output. If subsystem
selection by area, owner and/or zone had been specified, select the desired option for defining
subsystem loads. Click [Go] to produce the report.
Figure 13-23. Bus Based Reports Dialog, Load Reduction Output
PSS E Program Operation Manual, Section 11.6, Summarizing Load Reduction
Section 11.1.1, Boundary Conditions
13-22
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Limit Checking Reports
13.4 Limit Checking Reports
Power Flow > Reports > Limit checking reports
The [Limit Checking Reports] dialog provides tabs to produce all PSSExpress limit checking
reports:
Machine Reactive Capability
Generator Bus Limits
Machine Terminal Limits
Transmission Line Overloads
Transformer Overloads
Branch Overloads
Transmission Line Overloads
Transformer Overloads
Branch Current Ratings
Voltage Controlled Buses
Controlling Transformers
Out-of-limit Bus Voltage
Note that each report can be restricted by Area, Owner, Zone, Base kV and Bus, using the Select
option of the dialog.
13-23
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Figure 13-24. Limit Checking Reports Dialog
13.4.1 Machine Reactive Capability

Activity GCAP
Machine Capability Data File (*.gcp)
Clicking the Reactive capability tab in [Limit Checking Reports] will generate a report that tabulates machine loading and limit data. There is a checkbox option to update the machine reactive
power limits in the power flow case. The PSSE Program Operation Manual (Section 11.21.1)
provides details of the data records for the required Machine Capability Data file (*.gcp).
13-24
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Figure 13-25. Example of Reactive Capability Report
Section 11.21, Producing a Machine Reactive Capability Report

Section 11.21.1, Machine Capability Curve Data File Contents
13.4.2 Generator Bus Limits

Activity GENS
Plant outputs and voltages are valid only if the working case is solved to an
acceptable mismatch tolerance.
Clicking the Generator bus tab in [Limit Checking Reports] will generate a report that tabulates
the loading and voltage conditions at generator buses. The following reports can be selected:
Var limited plants with unequal var limits
All var limited plants
On-line plants
All plants
13-25
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Figure 13-26. Example of Generator Bus Report, On-line Plants
Section 11.22, Producing a Generator Bus Limits Report
13.4.3 Machine Terminal Limits

Activity GEOL
Machine outputs and voltages are valid only if the working case is solved to an
acceptable mismatch tolerance.
Clicking the Machine terminal tab in [Limit Checking Reports] will generate a report that tabulates
machine loading and voltage conditions at the generator terminals of on-line machines at type two
and three buses in the working case. The report may include all on-line machines or only those that
are overloaded.
Figure 13-27. Example of Machine Terminal Limits Report, Overloaded

Machines Only
13-26
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Section 11.23, Producing a Machine Terminal Limits Report
13.4.4 Branch Overloads

Activity RAT3
Clicking the Branches tab in [Limit Checking Reports] and then selecting the both transformer and
non-transformer branches option from the pull-down list will generate a report that tabulates branch
overloads. Options are available to specify the Rating Set and Percent Loading limit.
Figure 13-28. Example of Branch Overload Report, Default Settings
Section 11.16, Producing a Branch Overload Checking Report
13.4.5 Transmission Line Overloads

Activity OLTL
13-27
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Clicking the Branches tab in [Limit Checking Reports] and then selecting the only non-transformer
branches option from the pull-down list will generate a report that tabulates transmission line overloads. Options are available to specify the Rating Set and Percent Loading limit.
Figure 13-29. Example of Transmission Line Overload Report, Rate C
Section 11.18, Producing a Transmission Line Overload Checking Report
13.4.6 Transformer Overloads

Activity OLTR
Clicking the Branches tab in [Limit Checking Reports] and then selecting the only transformers
option from the pull-down list will generate a report that tabulates transformer overloads. Options are
available to specify the Rating Set and Percent Loading limit.
13-28
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Figure 13-30. Example of Transformer Overload Report, Default Options
Section 11.17, Producing a Transformer Overload Checking Report
13.4.7 Branch Current Ratings

Activity RATE
Clicking the Branches tab in [Limit Checking Reports] provides options to include any of the
following network components in the output:
Include non-transformer branches that are not breakers or switches
Include transformer branches
Include branches that are breakers or switches.
Options are available to specify the Rating Set and Percent Loading limit.
Selecting all three network component options with the all ratings option will generate a report that
tabulates branch current ratings.
13-29
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Figure 13-31. Example of Branch Current Ratings Report, Default Option
Section 11.19, Producing a Branch Current Ratings Report
13.4.8 Voltage Controlled Buses

Activity REGB
Bus voltages are valid only if the working case is solved to an acceptable mismatch tolerance.
Clicking the Regulated buses tab in [Limit Checking Reports] will generate a report that tabulates
those buses where voltages are controlled by generation, switched shunts, voltage controlling
transformers, FACTS devices, and/or VSC dc line converters.
Figure 13-32. Example of Regulated Buses Report
13-30
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Section 11.24, Producing a Regulated Bus Report
13.4.9 Controlling Transformers

Activity TLST
Clicking the Controlling transformer tab in [Limit Checking Reports] will generate a report that
tabulates those transformers in the power flow case where off-nominal turns ratio or phase-shift
angle may be adjusted by power flow solution activities.
The user has the option of listing All controlling transformers or of restricting the report to Controlling
transformer violations, those transformers where the controlled quantity is outside of its specified
band. The Output with voltage reversed option produces a report reversing the voltage option specified (pu or kV) in the Program Settings Dialog.
Figure 13-33. Example of Controlling Transformer Report, Violations Only
Section 11.25, Producing a Controlling Transformer Report
13-31
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

13.4.10 Out-of-limit Bus Voltage

Activity VCHK
Clicking the Out-of-limit bus voltage tab in [Limit Checking Reports] will generate a report that
tabulates those buses where voltage magnitude is outside the specified range. The example
(Figure 13-34) is based on the default limits, which can be changed by the user in .01 pu
increments.
Figure 13-34. Example of Out-of-Limit Bus Voltage Report
Section 10.20, Producing an Out-of-Limits Bus Voltage Report
13-32
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Reporting DC Network Conditions
13.5 Reporting DC Network Conditions

Activity MTDC
Unblocked multi-terminal dc lines must be present in the working case.
Power Flow > Reports > Multi-terminal DC line solution output (MTDC)
The multi-terminal dc line power flow output activity MTDC prints power flow solution results at all
dc buses of all unblocked multi-terminal dc lines in the working case.
Activity MTDC displays a popup message No unblocked multi-terminal dc lines in this case and
terminates if these network conditions are not found. Click [OK] to remove the message.
There are no user-defined options. The report is displayed in the Report tab by default (Figure 1335).
Figure 13-35. Example of DC Network Conditions Report
13-33
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Restricting the Output of Large Reports
13.6 Restricting the Output of Large Reports

13.6.1 By Area
Subsystem > Area
The [Area Subsystem Selector] dialog is similar to the area tab in the [Bus Subsystem Selector]
(see Figure 2-9). The buttons respond the same way, but the Memorize and Recall options are not
available. This dialog is used to limit report output and does not affect the [Spreadsheet] display.
Figure 13-36. Area Subsystem Selector Dialog
13.6.2 By Owner
Subsystem > Owner
The [Owner Subsystem Selector] dialog is similar to the owner tab in the [Bus Subsystem
Selector] (see Figure 2-9). The buttons respond the same way, but the Memorize and Recall
options are not available. This dialog is used to limit report output and does not affect the [Spreadsheet] display.
13-34
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Figure 13-37. Owner Subsystem Selector Dialog
13.6.3 By Zone
Subsystem > Zone
The [Zone Subsystem Selector] dialog is similar to the zone tab in the [Bus Subsystem
Selector] (see Figure 2-9). The buttons respond the same way, but the Memorize and Recall
options are not available. This dialog is used to limit report output and does not affect the [Spreadsheet] display.
13-35
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Figure 13-38. Zone Subsystem Selector Dialog
13-36
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Power Flow Reports

Exporting Power Flow Results to Microsoft Excel
13.7 Exporting Power Flow Results to Microsoft Excel
Power Flow > Reports > Export ACCC, PV/QV results to Excel
OR
Start > Programs > PSSE > Export results to Excel
The [Export PSSExpress Data/Result to Excel] dialog (Figure 13-40) requires specification of
the Contingency for export:
ACCC Analysis Results
PV Solution Results
QV Solution Results
If ACCC Analysis Results is selected, additional options are available. Click [Options] to open
[Specify psseexcel.accc Options] (Figure 13-39). The Solution Type (Contingency, Corrective
Action, or Tripping), Rating, and filters for Bus and System Mismatch may be specified.
Figure 13-39. Specify psseexcel.accc Options Dialog

Click [OK] to return to [Export PSSExpress Data/Result to Excel]. Click [ ] to open selection
windows for the file to be exported and the Excel output file, which can be a new file with the default
name of the *.acc file, a designated filename, or a previously-built file to be over-written.
Checkboxes are provided to select the desired Quantities to Export and contingencies.
Click [Export] to complete the action. The Excel Workbook will open in a new window.
13-37
Power Flow Reports

Exporting Power Flow Results to Microsoft Excel
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure 13-40. Export Data/Result to Excel Dialog
13-38
Chapter 14
Program Automation
Chapter 14 - Program Automation
14.1 Reproducing User Actions

A sequence of PSSExpress actions for batch commands may be recorded in a Python script (*.py,
*.pyc, or *.pyw) or Response file (*.idv). See Section 14.2 for details on specific types of files.
I/O Control > Start recording
A file selector window opens for specification of the type of file to record and the file name.
I/O Control > Stop recording
When done recording, select I/O Control > Stop recording to close the file.
14-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Program Automation
Creating Program Automation Files
14.2 Creating Program Automation Files

14.2.1 Response File
Activity IDEV
I/O Control > Start recording
An experienced user can create a response file using a text editor. The simplest and most robust
way, however, is to select the I/O Control > Start recording option. Note that this is equivalent to
executing activity ECHO in previous versions of PSSExpress.
Having selected a file, the user executes the required sequence of activities or operations using the
menu and toolbar functions in the interface. The resulting response file will contain, in Response
File form, a series of commands reflecting the users sequence of activities. The user can to tailor
this basic Response File for subsequent runs by editing the created response file by changing some
of the filenames and bus numbers specifying faulted nodes, switched branches, and so on.
As an example it can be assumed that, using the savnw.sav power flow case, the user wishes to
open one circuit between buses 151 and 152, solve the case, and then display the power flow
results for bus 151.
Using the interface:
Right-click the branch in [Diagram] and select Switch from the pop-up menu.
Employ the Power Flow > Solution > Solve option or the Solve toolbar button.
Select the Bus Based Output toolbar button and, subsequently, bus number 151.
If this series of operations were recorded, a response file would be constructed (see Figure 14-1).
Figure 14-1. Created Response File

It can be seen that the Response file contains PSSExpress batch (BAT_) commands. Consequently, the manual creation of a Response File, which could be done with the text editor, requires
an intimate familiarity with the PSSExpress batch commands. These commands are described in
the PSSE API Manual.
14-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Program Automation
Creating Program Automation Files
Section 16.12, Running a Response File
14.2.2 Python and IPLAN Files

The process described in the previous section for creating a Response file can also be used to
create a Python file (*.py) by selecting this file type instead of the Response file type (*.idv). The file
type is selected. The program records the sequence of events selected by the user in the same
manner.
Alternatively the user can create a Python file using the Python programming language. This will
facilitate a more sophisticated control of PSSExpress by enabling looping and decision making
based on results of analyses. Standard concepts such as looping and subroutine calling are available. For details on the Python programming language refer to a Python reference book or
http://www.python.org.
It is not possible to construct an IPLAN file using the PSSExpress recording facility. The file must
be created manually and compiled. It is very beneficial to be familiar with at least one programming
language and the standard programming concepts such as assignment statements, looping and
subroutine calls.
For details on the IPLAN programming language, the IPLAN language interface to the
PSSExpress working case and dynamics data, and the IPLAN compiler, refer to the IPLAN
Program Manual.
Section 16.4, Python Programs
14-3
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Program Automation
Executing Automation Files
14.3 Executing Automation Files

14.3.1 Run Automation File
I/O Control > Run program Automation file
Existing Python scripts (*.py), Response files (*.idv), IPLAN programs (*.irf) and PSAS/PSEB
(*.psa/*.pse) command files may be executed from within the user interface. PSSExpress will
open a file selector window and prompt for the appropriate filename to execute. Figure 14-2 shows
the dialog for selecting an Automation File:
Figure 14-2. Select Program Automation File Dialog

Only five file types are shown. This is because command line input and batch commands can be
assembled in the same file, so the Response File file type (*.idv) is used for either (or both). When
14-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Program Automation
the selected file is opened, the processes packaged in the Response file or programmed into the
IPLAN or Python file will be initiated.
A [Terminal Read] dialog (Figure 14-3) allows specification of data output to a file. Clicking [OK]
without specifying a filename sends the data to a Report tab.
Figure 14-3. Terminal Read Dialog for Automated Activity
14.3.2 IPLAN Program File

Activity EXEC
IPLAN Executable Program File generated by IPLAN language compiler program.
Select the desired IPLAN File (*.irf) from [Select Program Automation File to Run].
For details on the IPLAN programming language, the IPLAN language interface to the
PSSExpress working case and dynamics data, and the IPLAN compiler, refer to the IPLAN
Program Manual.
Section 16.16, Launching an IPLAN Program File
14-5
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Program Automation
14.3.3 PSEB Command File, Power Flow Calculation

Activity PSEB
PSEB Command file (*.pse)
Select the desired PSEB Command File (*.pse) from [Select Program Automation File to Run].
Section 16.14, Building a Response File, Power Flow Calculation
14.3.4 PSAS Command File, Dynamic Simulation

Activity PSAS
PSAS Command file (*.psa)
Select the desired PSAS Command File (*.psa) from [Select Program Automation File to Run].
Section 16.15, Building a Response File, Dynamic Simulation
14-6
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Program Automation
14.3.5 Argument Passing

These actions allow arguments to be passed to a response file. Highlight the desired file on [Select
Program Automation File to Run] (Figure 14-2). Click [Arguments]. The [Automation Arguments] dialog (Figure 14-4) allows a single line of arguments to be input.
Enter the argument string in the text box provided, and click [OK]. Click [Open] to run the automation file. The response file will be executed within the PSSExpress user interface with results being
displayed appropriately to [Spreadsheet] and Report and Progress tabs.
Figure 14-4. Automation Arguments Dialog
Section 16.7.1, Arguments in Python Files

Section 16.7.2, Arguments in Response Files
Section 16.7.3, Arguments in IPLAN Files
14.3.6 Re-Run Last Automation File
I/O Control > Re-run program Automation file
When the re-run option is selected, the last-run automation file will run again without reselecting it
from a file selector window. The [Terminal Read] dialog (Figure 14-3) allows specification of data
output to a file. Clicking [OK] without specifying a filename sends the data to a Report tab.
14-7
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Program Automation
Editing an Automation File
14.4 Editing an Automation File
I/O Control > Edit last recorded program Automation file
If a text editor has been defined in the [Preferences] dialog (see Changing Program Preferences),
selecting this option will display the last Automation file recorded by the program. If this is selected,
the text editor will display the file as it is created. You may have to refresh the view in the text editor
to see the changes in the file.
I/O Control > Edit last run program Automation file
If a text editor has been defined in the [Preferences] dialog, selecting this option will display the
last Automation file run by the program. If this is selected, the text editor will display the last Automation file run by the program. Selecting this item will re-run the last selected program automation
file without forcing you to re-select it.
Section 16.13, Recording User Actions
14-8
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Program Automation
Inserting Comments into the Progress Output
14.5 Inserting Comments into the Progress Output

Activity TEXT
Misc > Insert text into the Progress stream (TEXT)
During the operation of PSSExpress, a variety of information is sent to the Progress tab. This
function provides a mechanism for inserting descriptive comments. Comments can be directed to
any output device selected for recording the work session (see OPEN). A comment or message is
entered directly into the input field in the dialog.
Figure 14-5. Insert Text into the Progress Stream Dialog
Section 18.16, Inserting Comments into the Progress Output
14-9
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Program Automation
Inserting Comments into the Progress Output
14-10
Chapter 15
Output Controls
Chapter 15 - Output Controls
15.1 Directing Solution Output

Output from an interactive session in PSSExpress is typically directed to [Output] view. Since lists
and reports can be lengthy, the user may direct the output to alternative devices.
15.1.1 Global Report Destination

Activity OPEN
I/O Control > Direct Report output (OPEN)
By default, reports are sent to the Report tab in [Output] view. Options are available for redirecting
reports to a file, printer, or to the current progress device. The option also exists for suppressing all
reporting output. Report and progress destinations can be the same.
15-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Output Controls
Directing Solution Output
Figure 15-1. Report Output Destination Selector

If the Printer option is selected, the user further specifies the printer and printing options. If file
output is selected, the user must enter a filename in the Report output destination file field. Fortran
forms control can be enabled if either file or printer output is specified.
The Append to file, if file exists option may be selected if file output is selected. If enabled, then any
new report output will be appended to the specified file instead of overwriting it.
Section 18.7, Selecting Report Output Destination
15.1.2 Progress Destination

Activity PDEV
I/O Control > Direct Progress output (PDEV)
This option can be used to direct Progress output to an alternative device. Specification for the
[Progress Output Destination Selector] dialog is essentially the same as that described for
directing Report output. The only difference is that the default output destination is the Progress
tab.
15-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Output Controls
Directing Solution Output
Section 18.6, Selecting Progress Output Destination

Section 4.4, Virtual Output Devices
15.1.3 Alerts and Prompts Destination

Activity ODEV
None, although in practice, activity ODEV would be executed only from a
Response File or an IPLAN program.
Response File (*.idv)
PSSExpress generated alerts and prompts are sent to Alerts/Warnings tab in [Output] view. The
I/O Control > Direct Alert output and I/O Control > Direct Prompt output options direct these
outputs to an alternate destination or suppress output. The dialogs are similar to those used for redirecting Progress and Report output.
Section 18.4, Selecting Prompt Output Destination

Section 4.4, Virtual Output Devices
15-3
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Output Controls
Setting the Path for Use with & Filenames
15.2 Setting the Path for Use with & Filenames

Activity PATH
I/O Control > Set path for use with "&" filenames (PATH)
This function allows you to specify a directory path name that can later be represented by an ampersand (e.g., &myfile). This shorthand method for specifying a path name can be used by
PSSExpress file accessing activities. A filename prefixed by this ampersand will be obtained from
the directory specified in the path setting.
Select the directory path to be accessed by the & short-hand method by clicking any file in the
desired directory (see Figure 15-2).
Figure 15-2. Define PATH Dialog
Section 18.9, Setting the Path for Use with & Filenames
Section 2.4, PSSE Data Files
15-4
Chapter 16
Scenarios
PSSExpress studies are made up of a myriad number of files. Keeping track of these files has
always been the responsibility of the PSSExpress user. A scenario file collects in one place all the
files that are used in the study and can be used to automatically open files and perform automated
operations upon open and close. A new facility allows the scenario editor to collect all the files
contained in the scenario file into a zip archive file. This zip file, which contains all the files identified
as being part of the study, can easily be exchanged and the whole study setup recreated on another
users machine. When a scenario file is open, accessing files not currently in the scenario will automatically add them to the scenario.
Chapter 16 - Scenarios
16.1 Creating a Scenario File
File > Scenarios > New Scenario
The use of any of the Scenario functionality requires the creation of a Scenario file. The location of
the Scenario file is important, typically the directory in which most of the files to be used in the study
are located. Scenario files are created with, and identified by, a *.pssxml suffix.
16-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Scenarios
Building a Scenario
16.2 Building a Scenario
File > Scenarios > Edit Scenario
When a scenario file is open, accessing files not currently in the scenario will automatically add
them. You may also build your scenario interactively by using the scenario editor.
The [Scenario Editor] dialog (Figure 16-1) provides a template where files may be added or
deleted for a scenario. A dialog to change the root path to the location of the scenario file is also
available. Double-clicking a column heading will sort them alphabetically.
Figure 16-1. Scenario Editor Dialog

Click [Add file] to open the file addition dialog (Figure 16-2).
16-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Scenarios
Building a Scenario
Figure 16-2. Select a File to Add to the Scenario Dialog
The user must specify the file type in order to open the appropriate directory of available files. The
following file types may be added to a scenario:
RAW
Power Flow Raw Data file
DFX
Distribution Factor Data file
RAW_OPT Power Flow Data file, Options
ACC
Contingency Solution Output file
SAV
Saved Case file
SBS
Bus Subsystem file
DYR
Dynamics Model Raw Data file
PYT
Python file
IDV
Response file
DYR_ADD Add Dynamics Model Data

SNP
Dynamics Snapshot Data file
IRF
Compiled IPLAN Program file
SLD
Slider Binary file
PSE
PSEB Command file
OUT
Channel Output file
PSA
PSAS Command file
SEQ
Sequence Data file
OPF
Optimal Power Flow Data file
AUTO_OPEN Python, Response, IPLAN, PSEB or

PSAS file
SUB
Subsystem Description file
MON
Monitored Element Description file
AUTO_CLOS Python, Response, IPLAN, PSEB or

PSAS file
CON
Contingency Description Data file
EVS
Event Study file (*.evs)
UCT
UCTE Data file (*.uct)
Clicking [ ] opens the selection window. Highlight the file and click [Open] to return to the
scenario dialog, and click [OK] to add the file to the scenario. Certain file types, such as RAW, SAV,
DYR and SNP can only have one instance in a Scenario file. If one already exists, adding a new
one replaces the existing file. Other files types, such as SLD, can have multiple instances in the
Scenario File.
The checkbox in the [Load?] column must be selected to enable loading a file when the scenario
is opened.
After all desired files have been added and enabled for loading, click [Save Scenario].
If you want to use the edited scenario at this time, click [Load Scenario].
16-3
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Scenarios
Building a Scenario
You will need to click [OK] to end this activity.

All files in the scenario can be compressed into a zip archive for transfer to another machine by
clicking [Zip Scenario] to open the file compression dialog.
16-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Scenarios
Opening an Existing Scenario File
16.3 Opening an Existing Scenario File
File > Scenarios > Open Scenario
Opening a scenario loads all enabled files in the selected Scenario file (*.pssxml) into the working
case. If another case is active, you will be prompted to save it and any associated Snapshot files.
Any file in the scenario identified as an AUTO_OPEN file will be executed when the scenario file is
loaded if the [Load?] item is checked. This allows automatic execution of any Automation file that
performs study pre-processing.
16-5
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Scenarios
Closing a Scenario File
16.4 Closing a Scenario File
File > Scenarios > Close Scenario
Closing the Scenario file will close/unload all files specified in the Scenario file.
Any file in the scenario identified as an AUTO_CLOS file will be executed when the scenario file is
closed if the [Load?] item is checked. This allows automatic execution of any Automation file that
performs study post-processing.
Chapter 23, Scenarios
16-6
Appendix A
Summary of Toolbar Selections
Appendix A - Summary of Toolbar Selections
A-1
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
A.1 File
New Case / Diagram
Open
Save
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
New Case / Diagram
Create a new case or diagram.
Open
Open an existing file.
Save
Save the active documents.
Cut
Cut the selection and put it on the clipboard.
Copy
Copy the selection and put it on the clipboard.
Paste
Insert clipboard contents.
Delete
Delete selected items.
Undo
Undo the previous action.
Print Preview
Print preview.
Tree View Output Window Command Line Interface
Tree View
Show or hide the network tree.
Output Window
Show or hide [Output].
Command Line Interface

About PSSExpress
Show or hide [Command Line].
Undo
Print Preview
About
PSSExpress
Display program information, version number and copyright.
A.2 Diagram
Select
Rotate
Symbols
Rotate +90
Rotate -90
Show Grid
Snap
to Grid
A-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
Select
Select diagram items in [Diagram]. Items can be selected using common selection techniques (e.g., dragging a rectangle around several objects, clicking an item
and then holding down the [Ctrl] key to add more selections to the selection list).
The selected items can then be manipulated* in many ways.
Rotation
Rotate diagram items. If the rotation item is selected, and then a diagram item is
selected, the cursor changes to a circular arrow. Holding down the left mouse
button while dragging the cursor will rotate the selected item around its center.
Rotate +90
Rotate a selected item positive 90 degrees.
Rotate -90
Rotate a selected item negative 90 degrees.
Show Grid
Toggle on or off the display of a grid in [Diagram].
Snap to Grid
Toggle on or off the feature that causes the location of any newly created
diagram item to snap to the nearest grid point in [Diagram].
* Manipulation implies that an existing [Diagram] can be modified subsequent to its construction or during
its development.
Creation implies that diagram items, network items or simple annotation items, are selected from the Diagram Toolbar for construction of a new network diagram. This can imply the construction of a new power
flow case if the diagram items are bound to network items.
Sizable
Busbar
Horizontal
Sizable Bus Node Branch Breaker Switch Load Generator
Busbar
Sizable Busbar
The basic building block of a PSSExpress case and [Diagram]. Buses need to exist
in a [Diagram] before any lines or equipment can be drawn. Buses have a number of
discrete ports arranged along both sides of the busbar. When connecting lines and
equipment to a bus, the connection point will snap to the nearest port.
Horizontal Sizable
Busbar
The same as a regular bus, except that when drawn on the [Diagram] it is placed
horizontally across the screen instead of vertically.
Bus Node
Select when busbar representation of the bus is not desired. The bus node has a
number of ports stacked in the center of the node. When connecting lines or equipment
to a bus node, the connection point will snap to the center.
Branch*
Select to create a line between two buses. When the branch element is selected, the
cursor changes to a crosshair. The branch is started by placing the cross-hair on the
from bus and clicking. Any number of intermediate kneepoints may then be created by
clicking the towards the to bus. Clicking the to bus will complete the creation of the
branch.
Breaker
Select to create a line with a breaker between two buses. When the breaker element is
selected, the cursor changes to a crosshair. The line is started by placing the cross-hair
on the from bus and clicking. Clicking the to bus will complete the creation of the
breaker element.
A-3
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
Switch
Select to create a line with a switch between two buses. When the switch element is
selected, the cursor changes to a crosshair. The line is started by placing the cross-hair
on the from bus and clicking. Clicking the to bus will complete the creation of the switch
element.
Load
Select to create a load on a bus. When the load element is selected, the cursor
changes to a crosshair. The load is started by placing the crosshair on the bus and
pressing the left mouse button. The mouse is then dragged to where the load symbol is
to appear and released.
Generator
Select to create a generator on a bus. When the generator element is selected, the
cursor changes to a crosshair. The generator is started by placing the crosshair on the
bus and pressing the left mouse button. The mouse is then dragged to where the
generator symbol is to appear and released.
* At any point during the creation of a branch, breaker, or switch, the element may be canceled and
removed by pressing the [Esc] key. The attachment point of an element on a bus may be changed by
[Ctrl] clicking the attachment point of the element and then moving it to another port on the bus.
Switched Fixed
Shunt
Shunt
FACTS
Device
2-Winding
Transformer
3-Winding
Transformer
2-Terminal
dc Line
VSC
dc Line
Insert
Diagram
Template
Switched Shunt
Select to create a switched shunt on a bus. When the switched shunt element is
selected, the cursor changes to a crosshair. The switched shunt is started by
placing the crosshair on the bus and pressing the left mouse button. The mouse is
then dragged to where the switched shunt symbol is to appear and released.
Fixed Shunt
Select to create a fixed shunt on a bus. When the fixed shunt item is selected, the
cursor changes to a crosshair. The fixed shunt is started by placing the crosshair
on the bus and pressing the left mouse button. The mouse is then dragged to
where the fixed shunt symbol is to appear and released.
FACTS Device
Select to create a FACTS device between two buses. The FACTS device is
started by selecting one or two buses. One bus is selected to create a shunt
element FACTS device. Two buses are selected to create a series element
FACTS device. When the FACTS device item is selected, the cursor changes to a
crosshair. If a single bus was selected, the FACTS device is started by placing the
crosshair on the selected bus and pressing the left mouse button. The mouse is
then dragged to where the FACTS device is to appear and released. If two buses
were selected, the FACTS device is started by placing the crosshair on the
sending bus and clicking. Any number of intermediate kneepoints may then be
created by clicking the way to the terminal bus. Clicking the terminal bus will
complete the creation of the FACTS device. At any point during the creation of the
FACTS device, the FACTS device may be canceled and removed by pressing the
[Esc] key.
A-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
Two-winding
Transformer*
Used to create a two-winding transformer between two buses. The two-winding

transformer is started by placing the crosshair on the from bus and clicking. Any
number of intermediate kneepoints may then be created by clicking the way to the
to bus. Clicking the to bus will complete the creation of the two-winding
transformer.
Three-winding
Transformer
Select to create a three-winding transformer between three buses. The threewinding transformer is created by first selecting three buses. The three buses will
be regarded as the FROM, TO, and last bus in the order they were initially
selected. The three-winding transformer item is then selected, the cursor placed in
[Diagram] at the desired location for the symbol to be placed, and the left mouse
button clicked. Any number of intermediate kneepoints may be added to the links
between the symbol and the three buses, or the attachment points modified in the
manner described above.
Two-terminal dc Line
Select to create a two-terminal dc line between two buses. When the dc line item
is selected, the cursor changes to a crosshair. The dc line is started by placing the
crosshair on the from bus and clicking. Any number of intermediate kneepoints
may then be created by clicking towards the to bus. Clicking the to bus will
complete creation of the dc line.
Voltage Source
Converter (VSC)
dc Line
Select to create a VSC dc line between two buses. When the VSC dc line item is
selected, the cursor changes to a crosshair. The VSC dc line is started by placing
the crosshair on the from bus and clicking. Any number of intermediate kneepoints
may then be created by clicking towards the to bus. Clicking the to bus will
complete creation of the VSC dc line.
Insert Diagram
Template
Select to open a dialog that displays a list of available diagram templates.
* At any point during the creation of the two-winding transformer, two-terminal dc line, or VSC dc line the
two-winding transformer may be canceled and removed by pressing the [Esc] key. The attachment point
of an element on a bus may be changed by [Ctrl] clicking the attachment point of the element and then
moving it to another port on the bus.
A-5
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
Kneepoint
Annotation
Text
Diagram
Title
Diagram
Legend
Diagram
File Block
Summation
Label
Report Node
Label
Kneepoint
Select to put bends, or kneepoints, in a link that connects two diagram items. Links
are used to represent lines, the connections between two- and three-winding
transformer symbols and buses, and the connections between equipment and
buses. When the kneepoint item is selected the cursor changes to a crosshair.
Clicking a link will place a red square on the link. This red square can later be
dragged with the select item to achieve the desired shape. Kneepoints can be
deleted by selecting the kneepoint and pressing the [Delete] key.
Annotation Text
Select to place annotation text anywhere on [Diagram]. The annotation text item
is selected and text can then be placed anywhere in [Diagram] by clicking at the
location to display the text annotation.
Diagram Title
Select to place a title on [Diagram]. The title item displays the two-line diagram
title as well as the time and date of the last diagram update on the third line. The
time and date is updated on the title item whenever a solution is run and the
diagram is open in the application. The title item is selected and titles can then be
placed anywhere in [Diagram] by clicking the location where the title is to be
placed.
Diagram Legend
Select to place a legend on [Diagram]. The legend item displays the two-line
diagram legend. The legend item is selected and legends can then be placed
anywhere in [Diagram] by clicking at the location where the legend is to be
displayed.
Diagram File Block
Select to place a Diagram File Block on [Diagram]. The Diagram File Block
contains the current case filename and the current Diagram filename. The files
item is selected and file blocks can then be placed anywhere in [Diagram] by
clicking the location where the file block is to be displayed.
Summation Label
Select to place a summation record on [Diagram]. The summation item is

selected and summations can then be placed anywhere in [Diagram] by clicking.
As each summation is placed, the Edit Summation dialog is displayed that allows
the setting of the summation records (see Section 3.8.3, Adding a Summation
Record).
Report Node Label
Select to place a report node record on [Diagram]. The report node item is
selected and report nodes can then be placed anywhere in [Diagram] by
clicking. As each report node is placed, the [Edit Report Node] dialog is
displayed that allows the setting of the report nodes (see Section 3.8.4, Adding
a Report Node).
A-6
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
A.3 Zoom
Zoom
Combo
Box
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Zoom
Window
Zoom
100%
Zoom
Window
Zoom
Previous
Pan
Zoom Combo Box
Select a predefined magnification to apply to [Diagram]. Click the arrow to the

right of the combo box for a pull-down list of predefined magnification from which
to choose. You can also type in a desired magnification if it is not found in the list.
The Zoom Combo Box is automatically reflects the current magnification, which
can be changed through the use of the other zoom tools.
Zoom in/Zoom out
Increase/decrease magnification of the diagram.
Zoom Extent
Increase/decrease diagram magnification to fill window.
Zoom 100%
Quickly return [Diagram] magnification to actual size.
Zoom Window
Increase/decrease magnification of a selected portion of [Diagram]. The user

selects this item and then drags a rectangle over [Diagram] to encompass the
part of [Diagram] to be zoomed. The selected part of the [Diagram] is then
zoomed to fit in the extent of [Diagram] window.
Zoom Previous
Quickly return the [Diagram] magnification to its previous setting.
Pan
Scroll around the [Diagram]. Upon selecting this item, the cursor in [Diagram]
changes to a hand. [Diagram] is then panned by holding down the left mouse
button and dragging the hand around the window.
A.4 General Task
Select
All Buses
Create Bus
Subsystem
Toggle Bus
Subsystems
Bus One-Line
Diagram
Auto
Draw
Locate
Bus
Program
Settings
Create/Modify
Config Files
Select All Buses
Select all buses.
Create Bus Subsystem
Create a bus subsystem.
Toggle Bus Subsystems
Toggle between the primary bus subsystem and an alternate.
GOUT/GEXM
Create a graphical power flow bus display (GOUT/GEXM).
Auto Draw
Set interaction mode to automatically draw parts of the network.
Locate Bus
Locate and center the selected bus on the Diagram.
A-7
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
Program Settings
Change general program settings.
Create/Modify Config Files
Create or modify SUB, MON, and CON configuration files.
A.5 Automation
Start
Recording
Stop
Recording
Run
Automation
File
Re-run
Automation
File
Edit Last
Recorded
Automation File
Start Recording
Start recording automation file.
Stop Recording
Stop recording automation file.
Run Automation File
Select and run a program automation file.
Re-run Automation File
Run the last used program automation file.
Edit Last Recorded Automation File
Edit the last automation file recorded.
Edit Last Run Automation File
Edit the last program automation file used.
Edit Last Run

Automation File
A.6 Reporting
List
Data
Bus-Based
Reports
Area/Zone
Based
Reports
Limit
Checking
Reports
Area/Owner
/Zone
Totals
AC
Reports
Append
AC Output
File
List Data
List Powerflow, sequence and OPF data.
Bus-Based Reports
Generate Bus based reports.
Area/Zone Based Reports
Generate Area/Zone based reports.
Generate limit checking reports.
Area/Owner /Zone Totals
Generate Area/Owner/Zone total reports.
AC Reports
Generate ac contingency solution output reports.
Append AC Output File
Append to existing ac contingency solution output file.
Graphical Report
Create a graphical report.
Export to Excel
Export report to an Excel spreadsheet.
Graphical
Report
Export
to Excel
A-8
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
A.7 Results (Display on Diagram)
Toggle
Power Flow Impedance
Case
ASCC Fault
Annotation
Label
Results
Data
Comparison
Analysis
IEC Fault
Analysis
Reliability
Toggle Labels
Show or hide the display of labels on the active diagram.
Annotation
Edit the diagram annotation on the active diagram.
Power Flow Results
Display power flow results on the active diagram.
Impedance Data
Display power flow impedance data on the active diagram.
Case Comparison
Run graphical case comparison on the active diagram.
ASCC Fault Analysis
Display automatic sequencing fault analysis on the active diagram.
IEC Fault Analysis
Display IEC results on the active diagram.
Reliability
Display reliability results on the active diagram.
Dynamics
Display dynamics results on the active diagram.
Animate
Flows
Current
Loadings
Multi-Section
Line Reporting
Dynamics
Lock
Diagram
Animate Flows
Animate flows on the active diagram.
Current Loadings
Display current loading bar charts on the active diagram.
Multi-Section Line Reporting
Multisection Line reporting on the active diagram.
Lock Diagram
Lock the diagram.
A.8 Analysis
Solution
Settings
Solve
PV Analysis
PV Analysis
- Previous
QV Analysis
QV Analysis
- Previous
A-9
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
Solution Settings
Change network solution settings.
Solve
Solve.
PV Analysis
Perform a PV analysis.
PV Analysis - Previous
Perform a PV analysis using previous results.
QV Analysis
Perform a QV analysis.
QV Analysis - Previous
Perform a QV analysis using previous results.
ACCC Multi-ACCC
AC Corrective Reliability
Actions
Assessment
Inertial
Substation
Network
N-1-1
Solve for
Load
Reliability Connectivity
Analysis
Switching
Flow
Assessment
Check
ACCC
Perform ac contingency calculation.
Multi-ACCC
Perform multi-level ac contingency calculation.
AC Corrective Actions
Perform ac corrective actions.
Reliability Assessment
Perform reliability assessment.
Substation Reliability Assessment
Perform substation reliability assessment.
Network Connectivity Check
Perform network connectivity check (TREE).
Solve for Switching
Perform switching study (TYSL).
Inertial Load Flow
Perform Newton-Raphson solution with inertial / governor dispatch

(INLF).
N-1-1 Analysis
Perform N-1-1 analysis.
A.9 Topology
Scale
Split Bus
Join Buses
Tap Line
Move
Network
Elements
Scale
Scale load, generation, and shunts.
Split Bus
Split a bus into two buses.
Join Buses
Join two buses into one.
Delete
Network
Elements
Disconnect/
Reconnect
Bus
A-10
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
Tap Line
Insert another bus into a line.
Move Network Elements
Move equipment /lines between buses.
Delete Network Elements
Delete buses/equipment/lines.
Disconnect/Reconnect Bus
Disconnect/Reconnect bus to network.
A.10 Fault Analysis
Set Up Unbalanced
Network
Solve Unbalanced
Network
Unbalanced
Report
Automatic Sequence
Fault Calculation
Set Up Unbalanced Network
Setup network for unbalanced solution.
Solve Unbalanced Network
Solve and report network with unbalances.
Unbalanced Report
Unbalanced network report.
Automatic Sequence Fault Calculation
Automatic sequence fault calculation.
IEC 60909
Fault Calculation
IEC 60909 LL
Fault Calculation
IEC 60909 LLG

Fault Calculation
IEC 60909 LG
Fault Calculation
IEC 60909 Fault Calculation
IEC 60909 fault calculation.
IEC 60909 LL Fault Calculation
Perform an IEC LL fault calculation.
IEC 60909 LLG Fault Calculation
Perform an IEC LLG fault calculation.
IEC 60909 LG Fault Calculation
Perform an IEC LG fault calculation.
IEC 60909 LLLG Fault Calculation
Perform an IEC LLLG fault calculation.
IEC 60909 LLLG

Fault Calculation
A-11
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
A.11 Optimal Power Flow
OPF Solution
Settings
Solve OPF
OPF Spreadsheet
OPF Solution Settings
Change OPF solution settings.
Solve OPF
Solve OPF.
OPF Spreadsheet
Make the OPF spreadsheet active.
OPF Data Tables
Create/modify OPF data tables.
OPF Data Tables
A.12 Activation
Network
Spreadsheet
OPF
Spreadsheet
Dynamics
Spreadsheet
Model
Spreadsheet
Dynamics
Plot Sheet
Network Spreadsheet
Make the Network spreadsheet active.
OPF Spreadsheet
Make the OPF spreadsheet active.
Dynamics Spreadsheet
Make the Dynamics spreadsheet active.
Model Spreadsheet
Make the Model spreadsheet active.
Dynamics Plot Sheet
Make the Dynamics plot sheet active.
Slider Diagram
Make the Slider Diagram active.
Event Spreadsheet
Make the Event spreadsheet active.
Slider
Diagram
Event
Spreadsheet
A.13 Contour
Enable
Contours
Contour
Settings
Refresh
Contours
Remove
Contours
A-12
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
Enable Contours
Enable color contouring.
Contour Settings
Edit contour settings.
Refresh Contours
Refresh contours.
Remove Contours
Remove contours.
A.14 Dynamics Simulation
Dynamic
Simulation
Options
Dynamics
Solution
Parameters
Model
Maintenance
Dynamic
Simulation
Exciter
Simulation
Exciter
Response
Simulation
Governor
Response
Simulation
Dynamic Simulation Options
Change Dynamic simulation options.
Dynamics Solution Parameters
Change Dynamics solution parameters.
Model Maintenance
Perform network model maintenance functions.
Dynamic Simulation
Initialize and perform a Dynamic simulation.
Exciter Simulation
Initialize and perform an Exciter simulation.
Exciter Response Simulation
Initialize and perform an Exciter response ratio simulation.
Governor Response Simulation
Initialize and perform a Governor Response simulation.
Extended Term Simulation
Initialize and perform an Extended Term simulation.
Channel
Setup
Wizard
Subsystem
Channel
Selection
Bus
Channel
Selection
Line
Channel
Selection
Load
Channel
Selection
Machine
Channel
Selection
Extended
Term
Simulation
VAR/STATE
Channel
Selection
Channel Setup Wizard
Launch Channel Setup Wizard.
Subsystem Channel Selection
Select channels by subsystem.
Bus Channel Selection
Select bus channels.
Line Channel Selection
Select branch and 3 winding transformer channels.
Load Channel Selection
Select load channels.
A-13
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
Machine Channel Selection
Select machine channels.
VAR/STATE Channel Selection
Select VAR/STATE channels.
A-14
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Bus Fault
File
Line Fault
Clear Fault
Trip Line
Bus Fault
Apply a bus fault.
Line Fault
Apply a line fault.
Clear Fault
Clear a fault.
Trip Line
Trip a line.
Close Line
Close a line.
Bus Disconnect
Disconnect a bus.
Machine Disconnect
Disconnect a machine.
Unbalanced
Bus Fault
Branch
Unbalance
Change
Vref
Change
Gref
Close Line
List
Model
Data
Bus
Disconnect
List
Dynamics Data
Machine
Disconnect
List Model
Storage
Locations
Unbalanced Bus Fault
Calculate and apply an unbalanced bus fault.
Branch Unbalance
Calculate and apply a branch unbalance.
Change Vref
Change or increment Vref.
Change Gref
Change or increment Gref.
List Model Data
List model and data by model type.
List Dynamics Data
List Dynamics variables in network.
List Model Storage Locations
List model storage locations by type and subsystem.
A-15
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
NEVA
Eigenvalue
Analysis
Force
Generator
Conversion
Update
Plot Book
Update
Dynamic
Diagram
NEVA Eigenvalue Analysis
Launch NEVA Eigenvalue analysis module.
Force Generator Conversion
Force generator conversion when initializing Dynamic Simulation.
Update Plot Book
Update Plot Book during Dynamic Simulation if Plot every <n> time steps
option is specified.
Update Dynamic Diagram
Update Dynamic Diagram during Dynamic Simulation if Plot every <n>

time steps option is specified.
A.15 Scenarios
New
Scenario
Open
Scenario
New Scenario
Create new scenario.
Open Scenario
Open existing scenario.
Save Scenario
Save open scenario.
Close Scenario
Close open scenario.
Edit Scenario
Edit existing scenario.
Save
Scenario
Close
Scenario
Edit
Scenario
A.16 Event Studies
Run Dynamic
Event Study
Run Short Circuit

Event Study
Add Event Item
A-16
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
Run Dynamic Event Study
Launch dynamic event study.
Run Short Circuit Event Study
Launch short circuit event study.
Add Event Item
Add event item to existing event study.
A.17 Diagram Primitives
Line
Primitive
Arc
Primitive
Circle
Primitive
Ellipse
Primitive
Rectangle
Primitive
Region
Primitive
Line Primitive
Select to place annotation lines anywhere on [Diagram]. The line primitive item
is selected and lines can then be placed anywhere in [Diagram] by clicking. Be
aware, they are not branches!
Arc Primitive
Select to place annotation arcs anywhere on [Diagram]. The arc primitive item is
selected and arcs can then be placed anywhere in [Diagram] by clicking.
Circle Primitive
Select to place annotation circles anywhere on [Diagram]. The circle primitive

item is selected and circles can then be placed anywhere in the [Diagram] by
clicking.
Ellipse Primitive
Select to place annotation ellipses anywhere on [Diagram]. The ellipse primitive

item is selected and ellipses can then be placed anywhere in [Diagram] by
clicking.
Rectangle Primitive
Select to place annotation rectangles anywhere on [Diagram]. The rectangle

primitive item is selected and rectangles can then be placed anywhere in
[Diagram] by clicking.
Region Primitive
Select to place annotation regions anywhere on [Diagram]. The region primitive

item is selected and multi-segment polygon regions can then be placed anywhere
in [Diagram] by clicking the end point for each edge of the polygon. The region is
complete when the last point clicked is on the first point.
A.18 Diagram Options
Toggle
Auto-Position
Toggle
Bus
Manage
Diagram
Layers
Manage
Diagram
Views
A-17
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
Toggle Auto-Position
Toggle auto-position for selected elements.
Toggle Bus
Toggle bus symbol orientation.
Manage Diagram Layers
Manage order of [Diagram] layers.
Manage Diagram Views
Manage [Diagram] saved views.
A.19 Custom Toolbar

Refer to Section 5.3, Creating Custom Toolbars to establish functions for a custom toolbar.
A.20 Redirect Output
Redirect Report
Redirect
Output
Progress Output
Redirect Alert
Output
Redirect Prompt
Output
Redirect Report Output
Redirect reports to a file, printer, or to the current progress device; suppress

all reporting output.
Redirect Progress Output
Redirect progress to a file, printer, or to the current progress device;

suppress all progress output.
Redirect Alert Output
Redirect alerts to an alert box, file, printer, or to the current progress or

reporting device; suppress all alerts output.
Redirect Prompt Output
Redirect prompts and warnings to a prompt window, file, printer, or to the

current progress or reporting device; suppress all prompts output.
A.21 Status Bar

The Status bar fields, when in view, indicate various conditions for the users reference. Interactions
with [Diagram] cause updates to items in the fields. The fields are listed below.
Select an object on which to get Help Pops up tooltip on diagram component under cursor.
Met convergence tolerance
Notification that the last activity run met the specified limits.
A-18
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
Powerflow results
Indicates the type of results currently shown in [Diagram]. These

include, power flow, impedances, case differences, and short circuit
results.
MW/Mvar flow
Indicates units currently in use for the indicated type of results.
4.08, -1.49
The current cursor location in [Diagram] is constantly updated in

the Status bar. The X and Y location of the cursor are displayed in
the units specified for [Diagram] in [Diagram Settings].
Bind items
The current binding mode for new items created in [Diagram] is

displayed in the Status bar. The field displays either Bind items, indicating that new network items added to [Diagram] will create new
data in the working case, or No binding, indicating that no data is
added to the working case. Items added when this field displays No
binding will be displayed in the color red, indicating no corresponding
case data exists.
Next bus - 1
The next bus number for new buses created in [Diagram] is also
displayed in the Status bar. Autonumbering is handled with the
Power Flow Options menu; see Section 11.1, Specifying Solution
Parameters. If autonumbering is on, this field displays the number
of the next bus created. If autonumbering is off, this field displays
Autonumber disabled.
A-19
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
File
A-20
Appendix B
Network Component Data Records
Following are screen captures of the data records available when PSS Express-32.0.0 was
released. Since data records are a new feature, other network components may be updated using
these dialogs, depending upon the version of PSSExpress you are using.
Appendix B - Network Component Data Records
See Section 3.6.1, Using Data Records for a description of their use.
B-1
B-2
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure B-1. Bus Data Records
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
B-3
Figure B-2. Machine Data Records
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure B-3. Load Data Record
B-4
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
B-5
Figure B-4. Fixed Shunt Data Records
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure B-5. Switched Shunt Data Record, Power Flow
B-6
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure B-6. Switched Shunt Data Record, Short Circuit
B-7
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure B-7. Branch Data Record, Power Flow
B-8
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure B-8. Branch Data Record, Short Circuit
B-9
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure B-9. Two Winding Transformer Data Record, Power Flow
B-10
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
Figure B-10. Two Winding Transformer Data Record, Short Circuit
B-11
PSSE 33.5
GUI Users Guide
B-12

Express GUI Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Express GUI Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Express GUI Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PSSE 33.

Siemens Industry, Inc.

Copyright 1990-2013 Siemens Industry, Inc., Siemens Power Technologies International

Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Startup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

Establishing the Working Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

Changing Program Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

Defining the Program Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11

Changing Program Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12

Extended Bus Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12

Displaying and Resetting Timing Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14

The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15

1.10 Creating a Working Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Chapter 2 - Spreadsheet View

Editing and Formatting the Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Network Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

Exporting Spreadsheet Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Undoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Chapter 3 - Diagram View

Specifying Diagram Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Creating a New Power Flow Case using Diagram View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Opening or Importing Existing Diagram Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Importing an Image File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Diagram Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Using Auto-Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Displaying Power Flow Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Displaying Impedance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

3.10 Displaying Graphical Difference Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

Chapter 4 - Data Selection Tree View

Network Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

OPF Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5

Dynamics Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6

Models Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7

Plot Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8

Customizing Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

Configuring Custom Toolbar Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4

Creating Custom Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6

Part 2: PSSExpress Activities

Retrieving a Power Flow Saved Case File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

Listing Saved Case Filenames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Reading / Changing Power Flow Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Selecting Extended Bus Name Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Adding Machine Impedance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Managing Case Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Chapter 7 - Power Flow Data Modification

Changing Service Status and Power Flow Parametric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Electrically Disconnecting/Reconnecting a Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Joining Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

JOIN Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Splitting Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Tapping a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Changing Equipment Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

Moving Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

Removing Buses and Connected Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

Removing Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Scaling Loads, Generators, and/or Shunts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

7.10 Changing Adjustment Enable Flags of Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

7.13 Changing Owner Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36

Chapter 8 - Data Reports